Home

SMG-700 User's Guide V1.00 (Nov 2004)

1. COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE interface Enables a port or a list of ports for 13 port configuration channel port list bandwidth limit Enables ingress pir cir and 13 egress limits on the port s CLE Enables the guaranteed bandwidth 13 limits for incoming traffic on the port s cir lt Kbps gt Sets the guaranteed bandwidth 13 allowed for incoming traffic on the port s pir Enables bandwidth limits allowed 13 for incoming traffic on the port s pir Kbps Sets the maximum bandwidth 13 allowed for incoming traffic on the port s egress Enables bandwidth limits allowed 13 for outgoing traffic on the port s egress Kbps Sets the maximum bandwidth 13 allowed for outgoing traffic on the port s bpdu control Sets how Bridge Protocol Data 13 Xpeer tunnel di Units BPDUS are used in STP scard network gt port states broadcast limit Enables broadcast storm control 13 limit on the switch diffserv Enables DiffServ on the port s 13 dlf limit Enables the Destination Lookup 13 Failure DLF limit lt pkt s gt Sets the interface DLF limit in 13 packets per second pps egress set Sets the outgoing traffic port list for 13 lt port list gt a port based VLAN exit Exits from the interface port 13 channel command mode flow control Enables interface flow control 13 Flow control regulates transmissions to match the bandwidth of the receiving port Chapter 39 Introd
2. 2 STORY WAS ETT DULL DI d ZN AEL Limited Warranty T D TIED RETO 6 Customer SUBBOIT uu eicere aia R Ge doc dul Paw edd ad DNE 7 Table oT COREGUTS ausscietixauee c ki ore eai ceni CUapt ecce Cab UTC RC GIU UU el DU RR Rb Ui 9 List of FIGHEGS uoo iri ope xii LONE uk ame ivi ne Mese Capita es Pa ie bucNU cR TUA MF I MS ERR SERE 21 Eist f DATOS ETC 25 aine mee aa 29 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch cccccceeceeee cece teen eee ee eens eee ene eeeeeneeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 31 Tet OUD deas dai Doi estates e opaco dadas natn C undi ropa a 31 14 1 Backbone SDOIGIBO iuiscaseuxesetcubiek chop dicte bona miU FEVER epo Eee ha ERI iaae EN 31 UNA eem aae c ee o 32 1 1 3 High Performance Switching Example sienta ete hti be ena i ne kerrUdIS ne 32 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples sss 33 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example cene cerei nnno kenne dd Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection secessus 35 2 1 Freostending Inistellgligl uuiiaucesececccriser urhe a Led nci adr aab dee Paare ea ecl ia 35 22 MOUDOO the Switch ona Rack oixicenctidipnd tdem Coliseum xtd a Ud ea kan 36 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements sss 36 zT T PEBESB UDPIS ausneriitiireim etsi eed pets Atq ie MO rd ee eter 36 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch seses 36 2 2 4 Mounting tha Switch om a RAC
3. LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 32 Syslog 213 ES 2724 User s Guide
4. COMMAND DESCRIPTION ddp interface Enables a routing domain for 13 route domain configuration lt ip address gt lt mask bits gt exit Exits from the interface routing 13 domain command mode ip igmp lt vl v2 gt Enables IGMP in this routing 13 domain igmp robustness Sets the igmp robustness variable 13 variable 2 255 on the switch This variable specifies how susceptible the subnet is to lost packets igmp query interval Sets the igmp query interval on 13 the switch This variable specifies the amount of time in seconds between general query messages sent by the router igmp query max Sets the maximum time that the 13 response time 1 25 router waits for a response to an general query message igmp last member Sets the amount of time in 13 query interval 1 seconds that the router waits for a 25 response to a group specific query message rip direction Sets the RIP direction in this 13 lt Outgoing Incoming routing domain Both None no ip igmp Disables IP IGMP in this routing 13 domain 39 11 6 config vlan Commands The following table lists the vlan commands in configuration mode Table 95 Command Summary config vlan Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE vlan 1 Creates a new VLAN group 13 4094 exit Leaves the VLAN configuration 13 mode fixed port Specifies the port s to be a 13 list permanent member of this VLAN group Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 263 ES 2
5. 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 37 ES 2724 User s Guide 38 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 3 Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Panel Connections The figure below shows the front panel of the switch Figure8 Front Panel RJ 45 Gigabit Ports for stacking Console Port TT Peron errr rr 2 4 4 LI w a u m u a fod ToT LEDs 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Ports Management Port RJ 45 Gigabit Mini GBIC Dual Personality Interfaces The following table describes the ports on the panels Table 1 Panel Connections CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION 24 10 100 Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet Ports Two 100 1000 Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet Mbps RJ 45 Switches or use them to daisy chain other switches Gigabit Ports Two Dual Each interface has one 1000 Base T copper RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Personality Pluggable SFP fiber port with one port
6. COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE lacp Disables the link aggregation 13 control protocol dynamic trunking on the switch logins name Disables login access to the 14 specified name mac filter name name Enables the specified MAC filter 13 mac mac addr rule vlan vlan id drop src dst both inactive name name Disables the specified MAC filter 13 mac mac addr ule vlan vlan id drop src dst both mac forward name name Removes the specified MAC 13 mac mac addr forwarding entry belonging to a vlan vlan id VLAN group if any forwarded interface through an interface s lt interface id gt name lt name gt Enables the specified MAC 13 mac mac addr address belonging to a VLAN vlan vlan id group if any forwarded through interface an interface s interface id inactive mirror port Disables port mirroring on the 13 Switch mrstp lt treeIndex gt Disables the specified STP 13 configuration tree 1 6 mrstp interface Disables the STP assignment 13 lt port list gt from the specified port s multi login Disables another administrator 14 from logging into Telnet or the CLI mvr lt vlan id gt Disables MVR on the switch 13 policy lt name gt Deletes the policy A policy sets 13 actions for the classified traffic inactive Enables a policy 13 port access Disables port authentication on 13 authenticator the switch lt port list gt Disables authenticati
7. 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Figure 63 Policy Summary Table Index Active 1 Yes Name Classifier s Delete Test Example rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Policy Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies 144 Chapter 19 Policy Rule ES 2724 User s Guide Table 46 Policy Summary Table continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 19 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 18 4 on page 139 Chapter 19 Policy Rule 145 ES 2724 User s Guide Fig
8. 135 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration sseeeeeeee 138 TEA Classar EXIDE eme TIT m UE 139 Chapter 19 alc odi m c ITE 141 19 1 Police les OUBPVIBM aaositatecaeret IE e ER ER RRCLH IE NELLO POE HER RF PL E EO ERN 141 UE NEI and DSGP eU 141 19 2 Configuring Policy RULES iui cider cett ra ruedas o ru re ted eive a n 141 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration ssee 144 t uer duerme m 145 Chapter 20 Queuing n e 147 20 1 Queuing Method CUbrvigW arn es bnt ERR i SR rr ra ERR PLA Rd 147 PIRE CANI Me E oo o S 147 20 1 2 Weighted Fair Queuing 22cm erum iere tuere prices 147 20 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR esses 148 202 Ree WENT s ET 148 Chapter 21 VLAN Stac lig iie dpa ceri e Po UXECH RETE SEE SUREEIAMEYER 151 21 1 VLAN Stack DIO sscicieniruie t ie ettet iddaa iadaaa 151 Wad ad MBP Erie EXMP Rer 151 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port ROles uesei aser rri rives inia bv Ec 152 Va RUE PEDIS UD E a uss apna lands 152 FAN M Fame d xo EO T E Oo 153 214 Configuring VLAN SISERIIG sissies Se PUORUR ERRORI ERO S 154 Chapter 22 MB e coo ioodeu DRAKE IARE AA RU KEEIREE SNCH E ER VR UK A RAT R PAURA ERR IA 157 22 1 MCAS Ovaro oie autvietau itin ipd iet M ER be b EA 157 22 1 11P Multicast Addresses e 157 v S Real E E le EO EO 157 22 152 3E SHOUBID Sorten s
9. 214 Chapter 32 Syslog ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 33 Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 33 1 Clustering Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 80 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster members 24 Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member Switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members Chapter 33 Cluster Management 215 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 116 Clustering Application Example 33 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen Note A cluster can only have one manager 216 Chapter 33 Cluster Management ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 117 Cluster Management Status Index Clustering Management Status Configuration Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 00 00 02 The Number Of Member 1
10. cccccsscccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeees 315 Figure 135 Security Settings Java 2uuccsasci cerent brote rrv anas o n prete a Epp ccdS 316 Born REO IV m 317 24 List of Figures ES 2724 User s Guide List of Tables Table T Papel CODHSEDINOIS scissa ip edi oi ep sp weet dentis beu D sae ooo dai 39 pL o1 408 R eR mc 44 Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview ssee 49 Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details sesessssssss 50 Table 5 Navigation Panel LINKS 52 ep n bete piae ERR amine roS REA F PIDEN E 50 Table O GUS Wt 63 Tobie 7 Status Porm Details uraisi aaa aaa a god 65 Table e oysa WS eona UU CM 70 Table 2 Deneral SOUD siansa ARA EARN 72 BECOME ricis o NN ROTER RUF 74 Table TIP SENP t M 77 The TZ POR SEU oaio ai Fere LER E Reged Jeet e UR 78 Table 13 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Termihology iuuseketivaceckstevense bee prdaR SHE PY ORENSE PO nee ePIS 82 Table 14 VLAN VLAN SESS 25r etoiteorr aue Eee PEE ED E SEX Rad ERE PESE DICERE EEUU RI ERE PHEEERH EE MES 84 T ble 19 Statie VLAN rr c 85 Table T6 VLAN Static VLAN naiicicusmicomieususanondaiainaeassenpaeasmnnenaiia 86 Table 17 VLAN VLAN Fort Seling asstcamisdtiio ed Reni poda Rn p RIS 88 Table 18 Protocol Based VLAN Setup sessssseseemermeren 90 Table 19 Port Based VLAN Setup 2 ucebpraieset iuobr vbir ee pe tas bEEEI Sw IIS E Ge EE VEEE SEL A 95 Table 20 Static MAC Fo
11. Interface 24 10 100 Base Tx ports 2 GbE Dual Personality interfaces Each interface has one 1000Base T copper port and one Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP fiber port with one port active at a time Two Gigabit ports for stacking One local management Ethernet port Auto negotiation Auto MDIX One console port Compliant with IEEE 802 3ad u x Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x One Backup Power Supply BPS connector Layer 2 Features Bridging 16K MAC addresses Static MAC address filtering by source destination Broadcast storm control Static MAC address forwarding Switching Switching fabric 12 8Gbps non blocking Max Frame size 1522 bytes Forwarding frame IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet Il PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets STP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree capability 4 configurable trees QoS IEEE 802 1p Eight priority queues per port Port based egress traffic shaping Rule based traffic mirroring Supports IGMP snooping VLAN Port based VLAN setting Tag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K 256 static maximum Supports GVRP Double tagging for VLAN stacking Protocol Based VLAN Port Aggregation Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking Six groups up to 8 ports each Port mirroring All ports support port mirrorin
12. Table 51 VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the switch SP TPID SP TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Choose 0x8100 or 0x9100 from the drop down list box or select Others and then enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0x0000 to OxFFFF Ox denotes a hexadecimal number It does not have to be typed in the Others text field Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them 154 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking ES 2724 User s Guide Table 51 VLAN Stacking continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Role Select Normal to have the switch ignore frames received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority are ignored Select Access Port to have the switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service
13. Table 2 LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION BPS Green Blinking The system is receiving power from the backup power supply On The backup power supply is connected and active Off The backup power supply is not ready or not active PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally Ethernet Ports LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down FDX Amber On The Ethernet port is negotiating in full duplex mode Off The Ethernet port is negotiating in half duplex mode Gigabit Port LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down FDX Amber On The Ethernet port is negotiating in full duplex mode Off
14. Table 22 STP Path Costs LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED VALUE S CEA EDS ALLOWED RANGE Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN 11 1 2 How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the li
15. Table 32 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 33 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS __ KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 15 3 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status Click Advanced Application Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen displays by default See Section 15 1 on page 119 for more information 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port 120 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 52 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status Configuration Index 1 5 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 i 3 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 A 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 4 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 5 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 g 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 B 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 Aggregator ID Enabled Ports Synchronized Ports 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000
16. Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Location Enter the geographic location of your switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Person s Name Enter the name of the person in charge of this switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Login Precedence Use this drop down list box to select which database the switch should use first to authenticate an administrator user for switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control Logins screen The RADIUS is an external server Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first Select Local Only to have the switch just check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen Select Local then RADIUS to have the switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen If the user name is not found the Switch then checks the user database on the specified RADIUS server You need to configure Port Authentication Radius first Select RADIUS Only to have the switch just check the user database on the specified RADIUS server for a login username password and access privilege Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 2724 User s Guide Table 9 General Setup continued
17. DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 32 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management and then Syslog in the navigation panel to display the Syslog Setup screen Click the Syslog Server Setup link to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers 212 Chapter 32 Syslog ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 115 Syslog Server Setup eA Syslog Server Setup Syslog Setup Active O Server Address 0 0 0 0 Log Level Level 0 Add Cancel Clear Index Active IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 Syslog Server Setup
18. ES 2724 User s Guide Q3 FE Port SPQ Enable C spa C WFQ WRR Method Figure 65 Queuing Method GE Port SPQ Enable None BL LL LLLA LL BAILED SILI LIL BL LLL LL Bal ala ad al a al a a BCR eal el a al el ae a el TARE BULL e PA DEOL Qu ERS AST esrb CU ECR Df None j None z Weight 149 Apply Cancel Chapter 20 Queuing Method ES 2724 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strictly Priority services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth portion weight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights FE Port SPQ Enable This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Select a queue Q0 to Q7 to have the switch
19. Enable ports 1 3 4 and 5 for configuration Begin configuring for those ports sysname config sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface 42 2 2 bpdu control Syntax bpdu control lt peer tunnel discard network gt Chapter 42 Interface Commands 289 ES 2724 User s Guide where lt peer tunnel discard Type peer to process any BPDUs received on these ports network Type tunnel to forward BPDUS received on these ports Type discard to drop any BPDUS received on these ports Type network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU An example is shown next Enable ports 1 3 4 and 5 for configuration Set the BPDU control to tunnel to forward BPDUs received on ports one three four and five sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface bpdu control tunnel sysname config interface 42 2 3 broadcast limit Syntax broadcast limit broadcast limit lt pkt s gt where Enables broadcast storm control limit on the switch Il lt pkt s gt Limits how many broadcast packet the interface receives per second An example is shown next Enable port one for configuration Enable broadcast control Set how many broadband packets the interface receives per second sysname config interface port channel 1 sysname config interface broadcast limit sysname config interfac
20. MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The switch supports the following MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP 30 3 2 SNMP Traps The switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs SNMP traps supported are outlined in the following table Table 71 SNMP Traps OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION SNMPv2 Traps Cold Start 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the switch is turned on WarmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the switch restarts linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from non authenticated hosts RFC 1493 Traps newRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes topology change 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes Chapter 30 Access Control 197 ES 2724 User s Guide 30 3 3 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen You can click Access
21. None v v seconds None v 30 v seconds Ai i Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Control Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowest Priority system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group Dynamic Select this check box to enable LACP for a trunk LACP 122 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation ES 2724 User s Guide Table 35 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number ig Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Ch
22. Queue Weight Total Queue Weight x Port Speed For example using the default setting QO on Port 1 gets a guaranteed bandwidth of 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x 100 Mbps 3 Mbps Chapter 20 Queuing Method 147 ES 2724 User s Guide 20 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied 20 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application Queuing Method in the navigation panel 148 Chapter 20 Queuing Method
23. Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports 6 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the switch 64 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 24 Status Port Details Port Info TX Packet RX Packet TX Collision Error Packet Distribution D Port Details g Port NO Name Link Status LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KBs s Rx KBs s Up Time TX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause Tagged RX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause Control Single Multiple Excessive Late RX CRC Length Runt 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 512 to 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant Port Status 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 c o o o o oN o omo o o The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This fiel
24. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 15 2 1 on page 120 for more information on this field Enabled Port These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group Ports Synchronized These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group 15 4 Link Aggregation Setup Click Configuration in the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen to display the screen shown next See Section 15 1 on page 119 for more information on link aggregation Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 121 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 53 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration Grot OWES Status Link Aggregation Control Protocol System Priority 65535 T1 T2 Ta T4 Ie T6 Port Group LACP Timeout co SN c C amp c2 Ns ow e Active O up ID Active Dynamic LACP OOOO oo LI EELELCELELI Y seconds None 30 v seconds None 30 v seconds None v 30 v seconds 30 v seconds None 30 v seconds i None v 30 v seconds JUS a
25. Configuring multiple RADIUS servers is only available via the command interpreter mode Use the radius server command to set up your RADIUS server settings Syntax radius server host lt index gt lt ip gt radius server host index ip acct port lt socket number gt key lt key string gt radius server timeout lt 1 1000 gt radius server mode lt priority round robin gt where radius server host index Specifies the IP address of the RADIUS server ip acct port lt socket number gt Changes the UDP port of the RADIUS server from the default 1812 key lt key string gt Specifies a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the RADIUS server and the switch Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands 285 ES 2724 User s Guide radius server timeout lt 1 1000 mode priority round robin Specifies the timeout period in seconds the switch will wait for a response from a RADIUS server If 2 RADIUS servers are configured this is the total time the switch will wait for a response from either server Specifies the way the switch will process requests from the clients to the RADIUS server Only applicable with multiple RADIUS servers configured priority When a client sends an authentication request through the switch to the RADIUS server The switch will forward the request to the RADIUS server If no response within half the timeout peri
26. Giant This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame size Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 67 ES 2724 User s Guide 68 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 7 Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 7 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your switch The real time is then displayed in the switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a switch IP address in each routing domain subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes 7 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting and System Info to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen Chapter 7 Basic Setting 69 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 25 System Info xiu cm System N
27. Specifies the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge Specifies the priority for each port Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first Specifies which STP configuration these ports will participate in mrstp command only An example using spanning tree command is shown next e Enable STP on the switch Set the bridge priority of the switch to 0 Set the Hello Time to 4 Maximum Age to 20 and Forward Delay to 15 on the switch Enable STP on port 5 with a path cost of 150 Set the priority for port 5 to 20 15 sysname config spanning tree priority 0 sysname config spanning tree hello time 4 maximum age 20 forward delay sysname config spanning tree 5 path cost 150 sysname config spanning tree 5 priority 20 278 Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide 41 4 no Command Examples These are the commonly used command examples that belong to the no group of commands The no group commands are commands which are preceded by keyword no This command negates the intended action of the command In most cases the no command disables resets or clears settings There are cases however where the no command can activate features This section shows some uses of these commands 41 4 1 Dis
28. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Multicast IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Click Add to save the profile to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Chapter 22 Multicast 161 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 54 Multicast IGMP Filtering Profile conti
29. You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Port Setup screen Transparency MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address Learning learning to occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information 74 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 2724 User s Guide Table 10 Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave
30. day format help Displays help information 13 timezone Selects the time difference 13 1200 1200 gt between UTC formerly known as GMT and your time zone timesync daytime time ntp Sets the time server protocol 13 gt server lt ip gt Sets the IP address of your time 13 server trunk T1 T2 T3 TA T5 T Activates a trunk group 13 6 lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T Enables LACP for a trunk group 13 6 gt lacp lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T Adds a port s to the specified 13 6 gt interface trunk group lt port list gt interface lt port Defines the port number and 13 list gt timeout LACP timeout period lt lacp timeout gt vlan lt 1 4094 gt Enters the VLAN configuration 13 mode See Section 39 11 6 on page 263 for more information vlaniq gvrp Enables GVRP 13 port isolation Enables port isolation 13 vlan Enables VLAN stacking on the 13 stacking Switch lt SPTPID gt Sets the SP TPID Service 13 Provider Tag Protocol Identifier vlan type 802 1qlport Specifies the VLAN type 13 based wfq Sets the queuing method to WFQ 13 Weighted Fair Queuing wrr Sets the queuing method to WRR 13 Weighted Round Robin 258 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide 39 11 4 interface port channel Commands The following table lists the interface port channel commands in configuration mode Use these commands to configure the ports Table 93 interface port channel Commands
31. 00000000 The first three octets of the address make up the network number class C To make two networks divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit The borrowed host ID bit can be either 0 or 1 thus giving two subnets 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 and 192 168 1 128 with mask 255 255 255 128 Note In the following charts shaded bolded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits borrowed to make network ID bits The number of borrowed host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have The remaining number of host ID bits after borrowing determines the number of hosts you can have on each subnet Table 109 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 328 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting ES 2724 User s Guide Table 109 Subnet 1 continued IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER EAST OCIETBIT VALUE Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 110 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128
32. 1 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 GS 2024 Online MacAddr Name Model Status The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 Cluster Management Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following Member fields describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 118 on page 218 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 33 2 1 Cluster Member S
33. 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 129 Pop up Blocker Mail and News bj Pop up Blocker Turn Off Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Settings Synchronize eer ee Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled 310 Chapter 46 Troubleshooting ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 130 Internet Options Internet Options PIR p General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet gt zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing C Block pop up 3 Click Apply to save this setting 46 2 1 1 2 Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from
34. 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 xl aLr Clear Counter_ 30 9 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen Chapter 30 Access Control 205 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 111 Access Control Service Access Control Service Access Control g Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout Telnet Iv p3 SSH Ie l2 FTP e NN HTTP Iv feo 3 Minutes HTTPS Vv 443 ICMP Vv SNMP Vv Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 74 Access Control Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the n
35. 1000M for Gigabit connections Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port Choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex and 1000M Full Duplex for Gigabit ports only Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The switch uses IEEE802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to te
36. 30 8 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the switch then in your browser enter https switch IP Address as the web site address where switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the switch you wish to access 30 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate 1f you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked Figure 107 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer x Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or e changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate A The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority o The security certificate date is valid A The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes No View Certificate 30 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server ce
37. Figure 31 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type e Switch Setup VLAN Type 802 10 i C Port Based 8 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be e sent toa VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID 8 5 1 Static VLAN Status See Section 8 1 on page 81 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 32 VLAN VLAN Status C D VLAN Status J VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 3 49 44 Static Change Pages Previous Nex The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of This is the number of VLANs configured on the switch VLAN Index This is the VLAN index number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up 84 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 2724 User s Guide Table 14 VLAN VL
38. IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 Host IDs of all zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 2 2 or 126 hosts for each subnet 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is the subnet itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is the directed broadcast address for the first subnet Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The above example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a class C address space into two subnets Similarly to divide a class C address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones 1s the broadcast address on the subnet Table 111 Subne
39. LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Time Server when Bootup Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new dat
40. Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the switch is used so that you may securely access the switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates 1s optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the switch Please refer to the following figure 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the switch s WS web server 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the switch s WS web server Figure 106 HTTPS Implementation WS 443 HTTPS HTTP Note If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 202 Chapter 30 Access Control ES 2724 User s Guide
41. address has three host ID octets see Table 104 on page 326 available for subnetting Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting 331 ES 2724 User s Guide The following table is a summary for class B subnet planning Table 117 Class B Subnet Planning QUEE HOST SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS ape ale PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 332 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting ES 2724 User s Guide Numerics 802 1P priority 79 A access control limitations 195 login account 198 remote management 206 service port 205 SNMP 196 accounts and modes 236 address learning MAC 89 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 227 231 administrator password 199 aggregator ID 121 aging time 74 allowing pop up windows 310 alternative subnet mask notation 327 applications backbone 31 bridging 32 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 33 Switched workgroup 32 ARP how it works 227 viewing 227 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 227 automatic VLAN regis
42. mac Configures a static MAC address 13 forward mac addr vlan forwarding rule lt vlan id gt interface lt interface id gt inactive Disables a static MAC address 13 forwarding rule mirror Enables port mirroring 13 port lt port num gt Enables port mirroring on a 13 specified port mode zynos Changes the CLI mode to the 13 ZyNOS format mrstp lt treeIndex gt Activates the specified STP 13 configuration interface port Activates STP on the specified 13 list ports path cost lt 1 Setsa path cost to the specified 13 65535 ports priority 0 Sets the priority value to the 13 255 specified ports for STP treeIndex 1 Assigns a specific STP 13 4 gt configuration to the ports help Displays the detailed help for the 13 mrstp command multi Enables multi login 14 login mvr lt vlan id gt Enters the MVR Multicast VLAN 13 Registration configuration mode Refer to Section 39 12 on page 264 for more information no bandwidth control Disable bandwidth control on the 13 switch bcp transparency 13 250 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE classifier name Disables the classifier Each 13 classifier has one rule If you disable a classifier you cannot use policy rule related information lt name gt Enab
43. mame MH Oe wow ow Bak sae Ba as Roa v Ir VRRP Vv lv FI FI FI 4 5 6 8 9 1 22 23 2 2 a 27 28 wiviviiiii icm l0 1n 2 3 144 15 16 UV 18 1 2020 2 23 2 25 26 2 28 9 93 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 40 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Awy Port isolation zl Setting Wizard Incoming amp 5 10 1 10 1D M 15 1 1 1 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 GS o m a T 9 el j ele S8 3 3 3 3 3 5 3 8 8 8 I8I SI 8 S DR ELDLEL L ELBLLLB DD ELLELL LELLLLE LIELILELI ELLLDLC ELLCLE v cpu g Ficic wi cd 10 1 1 B M 15 1 6 1 618 19 20 21 22 23 M 25 26 27 39 DDBBE e DooDoo e e DODDO CCo mmm m EEEE m a E ee mm m EEEE m a a EE a a a mmm E m a eee m a a a Cc DODO tt ORE oo Oe rc Coo UC ORD oc ce DDD cic uc OD Coo UC ODDIE cc cle CODD cic oc coe DUOC BRIE cic e oC BIDE oo cc co a a S LUO CORI oe oo CBRE cc cic Ri LULU CRI ooo CRIDER Lc cc Ri mam eR a a ee mmm RR a a o c 0 mmm RR a a o c 0 mmm a CEIBIEEIL C c a a o C 0 ELLE ccc E BRRR i E E i i cc SS a Sy a a E a S a a a a a E a aja a a EC c LILIE Cio eo ODDIE cic cic oe RR ci c LILIE Cie io oC DDRII cic oo Co BRIE E iO OO ORDER cic cic Co RE ci a am et Hm eo er oo 8zZ 8512535532535 m amp 8 aana
44. queue weight 148 queuing 147 SPQ 148 WFQ 148 WRR 148 queuing method 147 150 R RADIUS 125 advantages 125 and port authentication 125 Network example 125 server 125 settings 127 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service 125 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP See STP 101 reboot load configuration 191 reboot system 191 registration product 6 related documentation 29 remote management 206 service 207 trusted computers 207 resetting 54 190 to factory default settings 190 restoring configuration 54 192 RFC 3164 211 RFC 3580 126 RIP configuration 171 direction 171 overview 171 version 171 RIP Routing Information Protocol 171 Round Robin Scheduling 148 routing domain 76 routing protocols 322 routing table 229 RSTP 101 See also STP rubber feet 35 S safety certifications 323 safety warnings 4 save configuration 53 190 screen summary 50 Secure Shell See SSH security 322 service access control 205 service port 206 show commands examples 267 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP SNMP 196 agent 196 Index 337 ES 2724 User s Guide and MIB 196 communities 198 management model 196 manager 196 MIB 197 network components 196 object variables 196 protocol operations 196 setup 198 traps 197 versions supported 196 SNMP traps 197 Spanning Tree Protocol STP 101 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 148 SSH encryption methods 201 how it works 200 imple
45. receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN tagged port Sets the port s to tag VLAN 13 list tags Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 265 ES 2724 User s Guide 266 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 40 User and Enable Mode Commands This chapter describes some commands which you can perform in the User and Enable modes 40 1 Overview The following command examples show how you can use User and Enable modes to diagnose and manage your switch 40 2 show Commands These are the commonly used show commands 40 2 1 show system information Syntax show system information This command shows the general system information such as the firmware version and system up time An example is shown next Copyright c 1994 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corp sysname show system information System Name ES 2724 System Contact System Location E Ethernet Address 00 13 49 00 00 02 ZyNOS F W Version V3 70 ARA 0 bO 09 01 2006 RomRasSize 3098410 System up Time 0 20 17 1dbal ticks Bootbase Version V0 7 09 01 2006 ZyNOS CODE RAS Sep 1 2006 18 00 27 Product Model ES 2724 Chapter 40 User and Enable Mode Commands 267 ES 2724 User s Guide 40 2 2 show ip Syntax show ip This command displays the IP related information such as IP address and subnet mask on all switch interfaces The following figure shows the default inter
46. the default 6 Click OK to close the window 314 Chapter 46 Troubleshooting ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 134 Security Settings Java Scripting Settings 125 Scripting E Active scripting E Allow paste operations via script O Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt amp Scripting of Java applets Disable CET a OQ Prompt Lleaw Aukhenkie Sion bd Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset cma 46 2 1 3 Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected 5 Click OK to close the window Chapter 46 Troubleshooting 315 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 135 Security Settings Java Security Settings 214 x Settings Q Disable 9 Enable BR Font download Q Disable 9 Enable B Q Prompt 3 Microsoft VM Java permissions Q Custom Q giga 9 High safety Q Low safety Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset E 46 2 1 3 1 JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window 316 Chapter 46 Troubleshooting ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 136 Java Sun General
47. 126 Type of Service ToS 177 338 Index ES 2724 User s Guide U user mode 236 examples 267 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA ventilation holes 35 VID 77 81 84 85 153 number of possible VIDs 81 priority frame 81 VID VLAN Identifier 81 VLAN 73 81 321 acceptable frame type 88 automatic registration 82 ID 81 ingress filtering 88 introduction 73 number of VLANs 84 port isolation 88 port number 85 port settings 87 port based VLAN 92 port based all connected 95 port based isolation 95 port based wizard 95 static VLAN 85 status 84 85 tagged 81 trunking 83 88 type 74 83 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 73 VLAN commands examples 297 VLAN number 77 VLAN stacking 151 153 configuration 154 example 151 frame format 153 port roles 152 155 priority 153 VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN VSA 125 126 and port authentication 126 W warnings 4 warranty 6 note 6 web configurator 47 getting help 55 home 48 login 47 logout 55 navigation panel 49 screen summary 50 weight of the switch 322 weight queuing 148 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 148 WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing 148 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 148 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 193 Index 339
48. 126 Chapter 16 Port Authentication ES 2724 User s Guide Click Advanced Application Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 55 Port Authentication PortAuthentication _ _ RADIUS Click here 802 1x Click here 16 2 1 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 16 1 1 on page 125 for more information on RADIUS servers From the Port Authentication screen click RADIUS to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 56 Port Authentication RADIUS OLD Port Authentication Authentication Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 UDP Port i812 Shared Secret 1234 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Port Authentication RADIUS LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run
49. 2 BIBpIpBi mm rpm Oo r1 ri ri lv Chapter 8 VLAN 94 ES 2724 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it d
50. 2 Configuring Multicast Click IP Application and IP Multicast in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 82 IP Multicast anrc Port IP Multicast Egress Untag Vian ID I poe 2 o 3 o p 5 cS 6 po 7 o 8 SS EI PFE OIE SF LI OST N pom m WE me N E A Le LL LN Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Chapter 26 IP Multicast 175 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 60 IP Multicast LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This read only field displays the port number A Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them IP The switch removes the VLAN tag from IP multicast packets belonging to the specified Multicast VLAN before transmission on this port Egress Enter a VLAN group ID in this field Enter 0 to set the switch not to remove any VLAN tags Untag from the packets Vlan ID Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your pr
51. 2724 User s Guide 34 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 122 MAC Table Sort by Index 1 2 3 4 5 AL Table MAC VID Port MAC Address VID Port Type 00 85 a0 01 01 00 1 8 dynamic 00 85 a0 01 01 04 1 8 dynamic 00 a0 5 00 00 01 1 2 dynamic O0 a0 c5 fe ea 71 1 CPU static O0 a0 c5 fe ea 71 2 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below MAC Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen 224 Chapter 34 MAC Table ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 35 This chapter introduces the
52. 3 no ssh Syntax no ssh key lt rsal rsa dsa gt no ssh known hosts lt host ip gt no ssh known hosts lt host ip gt 1024 ssh rsa ssh dsa where key lt rsal rsa dsa gt Disables the secure shell server encryption key Your switch supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication known hosts lt host ip gt Removes a specific remote host from the list of all known hosts known hosts lt host ip gt Removes remote known hosts with a specified public key 1024 ssh rsa ssh dsa type 1024 bit RSA1 RSA or DSA An example is shown next Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands 281 ES 2724 User s Guide Disable the secure shell RSA1 encryption key Remove the remote host with IP address 172 165 1 8 from the list of known hosts Remove the remote host with IP address 172 165 1 9 and with an SSH RSA encryption key from the list of known hosts sysname config no ssh key rsal sysname config no ssh known hosts 172 165 1 8 sysname config no ssh known hosts 172 165 1 9 ssh rsa 41 5 Queuing Method Commands You can use the queuing method commands to configure queuing for outgoing traffic on the switch You can only select one queuing method for the switch Syntax spq wfq wrr wrr fe spq lt Q0 Q7 gt where spq Sets the queuing method to SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing wfq Sets the queuing method to WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing wrr Sets the queuing method to
53. 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 66 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics ES 2724 User s Guide Table 7 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 1518 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length
54. A Product Specifications ES 2724 User s Guide Table 103 Physical and Environmental Specifications LEDs Main switch BPS PWR SYS ALM LNK ACT FDX Per Gigabit port LNK ACT FDX Per mini GBIC port LNK ACT Per Management port 10 100 Dimension Standard 19 rack mountable 438 mm W x 270 mm D x 44 45 mm H Weight 3 6 Kg Temperature Operating 0 C 45 C 32 F 113 F Storage 10 C 70 C 13 F 158 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing Power Supply AC 100 240V 50 60Hz 1 5A max internal universal power supply DC 48 60V 1 5A max 48 Watt consumption Wire Gauge Specifications Ground Wire 18 AWG or larger Power Wire 18 AWG or larger Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A Appendix A Product Specifications 323 ES 2724 User s Guide 324 Appendix A Product Specifications ES 2724 User s Guide APPENDIX B IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses IP address classes and subnet masks You use subnet masks to subdivide a network into smaller logical networks Introduction to IP Addresses An IP address has two parts the network number and the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID identifies a single device on the network An IP address is made up of four octets written in dotted decimal notati
55. Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server 16 1 1 RADIUS RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location Figure 54 RADIUS Server 16 1 1 1 Vendor Specific Attribute A Vendor Specific Attribute VSA is an attribute value pair that is sent between a RADIUS server and the switch Configure VSAs on the RADIUS server to set the switch to perform the following actions on an authenticated user Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic Assign account privilege levels 2 Atthe time of writing only Windows XP of the Microsoft operating systems supports it See the Microsoft web site for information on other Windows operating system support For other operating systems see its documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software Chapter 16 Port Authentication 125 ES 2724 User s Guide Note Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure a VSA The following table describes the VSAs supported on t
56. Chapter 3 Hardware Overview ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 13 Rear Panel AC Model 3 2 1 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel To connect the power to the ES 2724 AC unit insert the female end of power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to a 100 240V AC 1 5A power outlet Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans The ES 2724 DC unit requires DC power supply input of 48V DC to 60V DC 1 5A Max no tolerance To connect the power to the unit insert one end of the supplied power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel and the other end to a power outlet Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector The switch supports external backup power supply BPS The backup power supply constantly monitors the status of the internal power supply The backup power supply automatically provides power to the switch in the event of a power failure Once the switch receives power from the backup power supply it will not automatically switch back to using the internal power supply even when the power is resumed Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 43 ES 2724 User s Guide 3 3 LEDs The following table describes the LEDs
57. Commands Enter help to display a list of available commands and the corresponding sub commands sysname help Commands available help logout exit history enable show ip cr show hardware monitor C F show system information ping lt ip host name gt cr ping ip host name vlan lt vlan id gt ping help traceroute ip host name cr traceroute ip host name vlan lt vlan id gt traceroute help ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest ip gt lt cr gt ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest ip gt command lt gt sysname gt ee 27 Enter to display a list of commands you can use Sysname enable Turn on privileged commands exit Exit from the EXEC help Description of the interactive help system history Show a list of previously run commands logout Exit from the EXEC ping Exec ping show Show system information ssh SSH client traceroute Exec traceroute sysname gt Enter lt command gt help to display detailed sub commands and parameters sysname gt ping help Commands available ping lt ip host name gt lt in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt size lt 0 1472 gt Parte gt sysname gt 238 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Enter command to display detailed help information about the sub commands and parameters sysname gt ping lt ip host name g
58. Figure 71 MVR Network Example 22 5 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group 22 5 2 MVR Modes You can set your switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode 162 Chapter 22 Multicast ES 2724 User s Guide In dynamic mode the switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN 22 5 3 How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matche
59. Guide CHAPTER 23 Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 23 1 Configuring Static Routing Static routes tell the switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Click IP Application Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 79 Static Routing Static Routing Active rH Name Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Metric Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Destination Address SubnetMask Gateway Address Metric Delete 1 Yes Example 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 2 rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 57 Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 10 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate
60. IGMP leave message is received from a host 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority Multicast Frame IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Unknown Specify the action to perform when the switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Chapter 22 Multicast 159 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 53 Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reserved Multicast Group Multicast addresses 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for the local scope For examples 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts in this subnet 224 0 0 2 is for all multicast routers in this subnet etc A router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range See the IANA web site for more information Specify the action to perform when the switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make
61. IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address 1s 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 36 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the switch the switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 36 2 Viewing the ARP Table Click Management ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s Chapter
62. IP table 35 1 IP Table Overview IP Table The IP Table screen shows how packets are forwarded or filtered across the switch s ports It shows what device IP address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the switch or static belonging to the switch The switch uses the IP table to determine how to forward packets See the following figure 1 The switch examines a received packet and learns the port on which this source IP address came 2 The switch checks to see if the packet s destination IP address matches a source IP address already learned in the IP table Ifthe switch has already learned the port for this IP address then it forwards the packet to that port Ifthe switch has not already learned the port for this IP address then the packet is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion e If the switch has already learned the port for this IP address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the packet Figure 123 IP Table Flowchart Forward to all ports Is destination IP address in the IP Table Yes Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to packet outgoing port Chapter 35 IP Table 225 ES 2724 User s Guide 35 2 Viewing the IP Table Click Management IP Table
63. RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M send the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting 24 2 Configuring RIP Click IP Application RIP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown You cannot manually configure a new entry Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 7 6 on page 75 Chapter 24 RIP 171 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 80 RIP xu Active C Index Network Direction Version 1 192 168 1 1 24 None RIP 1 gt Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable RIP on the switch Index This field displays the index number of an IP interface Network This field displays the IP interface configured on the switch Refer to the section on IP Setup for more information on configuring IP domains Direction Select the RIP direction from the drop down list box Choices are Outgoing Incoming Both and None Version Select the RIP version from the drop down list box Choices are RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or
64. STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 NN c RA ae REP E Sr per ae Of Pe fg ns C Any so E ClesrCounter The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 24 on page 65 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting Port Setup screen Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 63 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 6 Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 3 on page 102 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port
65. Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections gt Java Sun Use Java 2 v1 4 1 07 for applet requires restart 3 Microsoft VM akaga console enabled requires restart n jogging enabled ompiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing of b Restore Defaults Cancel Apply 46 3 Problems with the Password Table 99 Troubleshooting the Password PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Cannot access the The password field is case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct Switch password using the proper casing The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the password Chapter 46 Troubleshooting 317 ES 2724 User s Guide 318 Chapter 46 Troubleshootin
66. Server Status screen displays Chapter 28 DHCP 181 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 87 DHCP DHCP Server Status DHCP Server Status Server Relay Index VID Server Status IP Pool Size 1 2 10 10 10 100 100 Polling Interval s 40 Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 DHCP DHCP Server Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Server Status This field displays the starting DHCP client IP address IP Pool Size This field displays the size of the DHCP client IP address pool Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to end status polling 28 3 Configuring DHCP Server Use this screen to configure your DHCP server settings Click IP Application DHCP in the navigation panel Click the Server link In the DHCP Server Status screen that displays 182 Chapter 28 DHCP ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 88 DHCP Server ED DHCP Server Status VID 1 Client IP Pool Starting Address booo Size of Client IP Pool a IP Subnet Mask opo Default Gateway booo Primary DNS Server ono Secondary DNS Server pono Add Cancel Clea
67. Snooping The switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Classifier and Policy You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address port number or protocol type etc Queuing Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Three scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Weighted Round Robin WRR and Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ This allows the switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes tell the switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Appendix A Product Spec
68. Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 170 Chapter 23 Static Route ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 24 RIP This chapter shows you how to configure RIP Routing Information Protocol 24 1 RIP Overview RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information with other routers The Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to Both the switch will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives Incoming the switch will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received e Outgoing the switch will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received None the switch will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the switch sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information
69. This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning SERE iene ARAN Saleem TERE CEHUERGEE ARS HRS ARTS TESTES ASS BRA ee SAS Ee Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certification
70. VLAN e Use the vlan vlan id command to create a VLAN VID 3 in this example for managing the switch and the switch will activate the new management VLAN Use the inactive command to disable the new management VLAN sysname config vlan 3 sysname config vlan inactive Chapter 43 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 297 ES 2724 User s Guide 43 2 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands This section shows you how to configure and monitor the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 43 2 1 GARP Status Syntax show garp This command shows the switch s GARP timer settings including the join leave and leave all timers An example is shown next sysnamet show garp GARP Timer Join Timer 200 Leave Timer 600 Leave All Timer 10000 sysname 43 2 2 GARP Timer Syntax garp join lt msec gt leave lt msec gt leaveall lt msec gt where join lt msec gt This sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 32767 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds leave lt msec gt This sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds This sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in SOS milliseconds
71. a port on the switch The switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated 17 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Chapter 17 Port Security 131 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 58 Port Security 4 0 ON 4 60 IND OLED Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Active C v S Xl s u Hu HuHu HuHu HuHu S x Xx 4 I Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable port security on the switch Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them
72. active at a time Interfaces e 2 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Gigabit Ports Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches 2 Mini GBIC Ports Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber optic connections to backbone Ethernet switches Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 39 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 1 Panel Connections continued CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION Console Port Only connect this port if you want to configure the switch using the command line interface CLI via the console port Management Connect to a computer using an RJ 45 Ethernet cable for local configuration of the Port Switch 3 1 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the switch Connect the female end to a serial port COMI COM2 or other COM port of your computer 3 1 2 Ethernet Ports The switch has 24 10 100Mbps auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 10 100Mbps Fast Ethernet the speed can be 10Mbps or 100Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex There are two Dual Personality interfaces Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports The mini GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit port
73. all commands with privilege levels from 0 to 12 0 privilege level commands are available to all login accounts Note If you use an external RADIUS server to authenticate users you can use a VSA Vendor Specific Attribute to configure a privilege level for an account on the RADIUS server See Section 16 1 1 1 on page 125 for more information Use the following commands to specify privilege levels for login accounts Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 235 ES 2724 User s Guide Syntax logins username username password password logins username username privilege 0 14 where username username Specifies a new user up to 32 alphanumeric characters Enter a user name to change the settings of an existing account password password Specifies the new password up to 32 alphanumeric characters for this user privilege 0 14 Assigns a privilege level for the user 39 7 Command Modes There are three command modes User Enable and Configure The modes and commands available to you depend on what level of privilege your account has See Section 39 6 on page 235 for more information on setting up privilege levels When you first log into the command interpreter with a read only account having a privilege of 0 to 12 the initial mode is the User mode The User mode commands are a subset of Enable mode commands The User mode command prompt ends with an angle bracket gt To enter Ena
74. apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 22 on page 101 for more information 106 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 2724 User s Guide Table 25 RSTP Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 11 4 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status scre
75. bandwidth limit command Syntax no bandwidth limit An example is shown next Disable bandwidth limit on portl sysname config interface port channel 1 sysname config interface no bandwidth limit cir 296 Chapter 42 Interface Commands ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 43 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN and associated commands 43 1 Configuring Tagged VLAN The following procedure shows you how to configure tagged VLAN 1 Use the IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN commands to configure tagged VLAN for the switch Use the vlan lt vlan id gt command to configure or create a VLAN on the switch The switch automatically enters the config vlan mode Use the inactive command to deactivate the VLAN s e Use the interface port channel port list command to enter the config interface mode to set the VLAN settings on a port then use the pvid lt vlan id gt command to set the VLAN ID you created for the port list to that specific port in the PVID table Use the exit command when you are finished configuring the VLAN sysname config vlan 2000 sysname config vlan name upl sysname config vlan fixed 5 8 sysname config vlan no untagged 5 8 sysname config vlan exit sysname config interface port channel 5 8 sysname config interface pvid 2000 sysname config interface exit 2 Configure your management
76. can view the MAC addresses IP address resolution table Routing Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the routing table Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to other ports 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management Access Control and then Logins to display the next screen 52 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 17 Change Administrator Login Password Logins Access Control eeu Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm 1 CMM mcum Le Sass JU RS aE a a Poo e d Apply Cancel 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the switch s storage that remains even if the switch s power is turned off Note Use the Save link when you are done with a configu
77. configuration file using a text editor Make sure you use valid commands The switch rejects configuration files with invalid or incomplete commands 39 10 2 Logging Out In User or Enable mode enter the exit or 1ogout command to log out of the CLI In Config mode entering exit takes you out of the Config mode and into Enable mode and entering logout logs you out of the CLI 39 11 Command Summary The following sections summarize the commands available in the switch together with a brief description of each command Commands listed in the tables are in the same order as they are displayed in the CLI See the related section in the User s Guide for more background information 39 11 1 User Mode The following table describes the commands available for User mode Table 90 Command Summary User Mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE help Displays help information 0 logout Exits from the CLI 0 exit Logs out from the CLI 0 history Displays a list of previously command s that you 0 have executed The switch stores up to 256 commands in history enable Accesses Enable or privileged mode See Section 0 39 11 2 on page 241 show ip Displays IP related information 0 hardware monitor Displays current hardware monitor information with O C F the specified temperature unit Celsius C or Fahrenheit F system information Displays general system information 0 ping lt IP host name gt Sends Pin
78. gi i NAAN nef i eg ELE NE LEE SE OE TE ELS LS CP CX wi Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the switch 178 Chapter 27 Differentiated Services ES 2724 User s Guide Table 61 DiffServ continued LABEL DESCRIPTION i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again 27 3 DSCP to IEEE802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping to allow the switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1P mapping Table 62 De
79. in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 124 IP Table Sort by Index 1 2 3 OLAF j VID Port IP Address VID Port Type 192 168 1 5 1 6 dynamic 192 168 1 10 0 CPU static 192 168 1 255 0 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below IP Click this button to display and arrange the data according to IP address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This field displays the index number IP Address This is the IP address of the device from which the incoming packets came VID This is the VLAN group to which the packet belongs Port This is the port from which the above IP address was learned This field displays CPU to indicate the IP address belongs to the switch Type This shows whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the switch or static belonging to the switch 226 Chapter 35 IP Table ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 36 ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 36 1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address
80. information to an Ethernet device with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 sysname gt traceroute 192 168 1 100 traceroute to 192 168 1 100 30 hops max 40 byte packet 1 192 168 1 100 10 ms 10 ms 0 ms traceroute done sysname gt 40 5 Copy Port Attributes Use the copy running config command to copy attributes of one port to another port or ports Syntax copy running config interface port channel lt port gt lt port list gt copy running config interface port channel lt port gt lt port list gt gt active name speed duplex bpdu control flow control intrusion lock vlanlq vlanlq member bandwidth limit gt vlan stacking port security broadcast storm control mirroring gt port access authenticator queuing method igmp filtering gt spanning tree mrstp protocol based vlan port based vlan Chapter 40 User and Enable Mode Commands 271 ES 2724 User s Guide where copy running config interface port channel port lt port list gt copy running config interface port channel port lt port list gt active An example is shown next Copies all of the possible attributes from one port to another port or ports Copies only the specified port attributes from one port to another port or ports Copy all attributes of port 1 to port 2 Copy selected attributes active bandwidth limit and STP settings to ports 5 8 sysna
81. isses rrt trei c rrt neta E ERE h xu Rape 326 Table 105 Allowed IP Address Range By Class eee 326 Table 108 Matura Maks usse tote tents eb Sila aed p Fede Ra tt ae Ee sass 327 Table 107 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ssssssssssmm 327 Table 108 Two oubnels Example uices i cieser boit ape Eee pia te ME ERRER anrasinen rinin 328 TaD TOI 4 M c 328 Table TIO SUDA 2 urasna EN 329 Table I SUBNEUT T 329 Tabie T SUD S srei a aaa 330 Tabie VS SURMAS qousncevendudei ue AE Nei i ES 330 BE Xen or T 330 Tople 715 EOM SUDO aia ssi etu e aicp PARK bad esearch Eon E caren ER C D ER EUREN AEGRO ILE Redde 331 Table 116 Class C Subnet Planning uuuccisccc cie sir tritt erra ttti derat ardiente 331 Table 117 Class B Subnet Planning 5 hockin Lene 1a eR SERERE LBS EPUM SRERR FL SR ER T d 03 332 List of Tables 27 ES 2724 User s Guide 28 List of Tables ES 2724 User s Guide Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the ES 2724 Ethernet Switch This preface introduces you to the ES 2724 Ethernet Switch and discusses the conventions of this User s Guide It also provides information on other related documentation About This User s Guide This manual is designed to guide you through the installation and configuration of your switch for its various applications Related Documentation Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of indiv
82. loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again 172 Chapter 24 RIP ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 25 IGMP This chapter shows you how to configure IGMP 25 1 IGMP Overview IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a session layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 and RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively The switch supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the switch queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the switch periodically updates this information 25 2 Configuring IGMP Click IP Application IGMP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 7 6 on page 75 Figure 81 IGMP xum Active Index r Network Version 1 172 21 4 7316 None me 2 192 168 1 1 24 None ha Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 IGMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable IGMP on the switch Note You cannot enable both IGMP snooping and IGMP at the same tim
83. more detail Port without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Enter the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number E Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 118 Chapter 14 Mirroring ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 15 Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 15 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high s
84. neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your switch Chapter 23 Static Route 169 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 57 Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purpose only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address
85. on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes and start configuring the screen again 180 Chapter 27 Differentiated Services ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 28 DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 28 1 DHCP Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the switch as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the switch provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you disable the DHCP service you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured 28 1 1 DHCP modes The switch can be configured as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent e f you configure the switch as a DHCP server it will maintain the pool of addresses and distribute them to your LAN computers If there is an Ethernet device that performs the DHCP server function for your network then you can configure the switch as a DHCP relay agent When the switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the Ethernet device the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer 28 2 DHCP Server Status Click IP Application DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP
86. precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Specifies a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Deactivates a static route Create a static route with the destination IP address of 172 21 1 104 subnet mask of 255 255 0 0 and the gateway IP address of 192 168 1 2 Assigns a metric value of 2 to the static route Assigns the name routel to the static route sysname config ip route 172 21 1 104 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 sysname config ip route 172 21 1 104 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 metric 2 sysname config ip route 172 21 1 104 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 name routel 41 7 Enabling MAC Filtering You can create a filter to drop packets based on the MAC address of the source or the destination Syntax mac filter name name mac mac addr vlan vlan id drop lt src dst both gt Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands 283 ES 2724 User s Guide where name name mac mac addr vlan vlan id drop lt src dst both gt An example is shown next Names the filtering rule Specifies the MAC address you want to filter Specifies which VLAN this rule applies to Selects the behavior of the rule src drop packets coming from the specified MAC address dst drop packets going to the specified MAC address both drop packets coming from or going to the specified MAC addres
87. provider s network In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 8 on page 81 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority On the switch configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 155 ES 2724 User s Guide 156 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 22 Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features 22 1 Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to e
88. screen 34 1 MAC Table Overview MAC Table The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address 1s dynamic learned by the switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure 1 The switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table Ifthe switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port Ifthe switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion Ifthe switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 121 MAC Table Flowchart 4 Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this frame Forward to outgoing port Chapter 34 MAC Table 223 ES
89. second 14 15 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 11 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Spanning Tree Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to configure MRSTP settings Refer to Section 11 3 on page 104 Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay 110 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 2724 User s Guide Table 28 Spanning Tree Protocol Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on
90. server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 30 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time Chapter 30 Access Control 201 ES 2724 User s Guide 30 6 1 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the switch over SSH 30 7 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages
91. servers etc Figure 1 Backbone Application Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 31 ES 2724 User s Guide 1 1 2 Bridging Example In this example application the switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port on the switch Moreover the switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a single location Figure 2 Bridging Application ON Internet gt e um m m Sales a L A f mmm emm mm mm 1 1 3 High Performance Switching Example The switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth In the following example use trunking to connect these two networks Switching to higher speed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained
92. the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 43 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 138 Chapter 18 Classifier ES 2724 User s Guide Table 43 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 Some of the most common IP ports are Table 44 Common IP Ports PORT NUMBER PORT NAME 21 FTP 23 Telnet 25 SMTP 53 DNS 80 HTTP 110 POP3 18 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy in the Policy screen to define action s on the classified traffic flow Chapter 18 Classifier 139 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 61 Classifier Example Active iv Example Packet Format All Name VLAN Priority Ethernet Type Layer 2 Destinatio
93. your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Chapter 46 Troubleshooting 311 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 131 Internet Options Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet E zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable CJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker S Prevent most pop up windows from appearing 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 1 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Block pop ups 312 Chapter 46 Troubleshooting ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 132 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings 3 Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 4 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Add Notifications and Filter Level Play a s
94. 091 359 www zyxel cz ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modranska 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ceska Republika support zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 00 www zyxel dk ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej DENMARK sales zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 07 2860 Soeborg Denmark support zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8411 www zyxel fi ZyXEL Communications Oy FINLAND a Malminkaari 10 sales zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8448 00700 Helsinki Finland info zyxel fr 33 4 72 52 97 97 www zyxel fr ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers FRANCE 33 4 72 52 19 20 Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France support zyxel de 49 2405 6909 0 www zyxel de ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH GERMANY Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 sales zyxel de 49 2405 6909 99 Wuerselen Germany support zyxel hu 36 1 3361649 www zyxel hu ZyXEL Hungary HUNGARY 48 Zoldlomb Str info zyxel hu 36 1 3259100 H 1025 Budapest Hungary http zyxel kz support 7 3272 590 698 www zyxel kz ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk ave Office 414 KAZAKHSTAN sales zyxel kz 7 3272 590 689 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan support zyxel com 1 800 255 4101 www us zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Inc 1 714 632 0882 1130 N Miller St NORTH AMERICA Anaheim sales zyxel com 1 714 632 0858 ftp us zyxel com T is Customer Support ES 2724 User s Guide METHOD LOCATION SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE R
95. 1 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 192 168 1 192 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 330 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting ES 2724 User s Guide The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 115 Eight Subnets BROADCAST SUBNET SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 The following table is a summary for class C subnet planning Table 116 Class C Subnet Planning NO BORROWED HOST NO HOSTS PER BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 255 255 255 128 25 255 255 255 192 26 62 255 255 255 224 27 30 126 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 NI OO oO BR oO rm Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks For class A and class B addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of the network number and which are part of the host ID A class B address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class A
96. 1 Enter Password ftp 1s 200 Port c W Ww w rw rw rw W Ww w rw rw rw 226 File s ftp bin 200 Type I 200 Port c 226 File r ftp 2 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 1 220 switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 58 46 1970 168 0 1 none admin PASS command 230 Logged in ommand okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST 1 owner group l owner group l owner group 1 owner group ent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec OK ftp put 3701t0 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 ommand okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 eceived OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config O Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 82 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 3601t0 bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration f
97. 111 240 to 255 reserved 326 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting ES 2724 User s Guide Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The natural masks for class A B and C IP addresses are as follows Table 106 Natural Masks CLASS NATURAL MASK A 255 0 0 0 B 255 255 0 0 C 255 255 255 0 Subnetting With subnetting the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored For example a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID With subnetting some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number
98. 128 9 rz 7 C ize 9 T 8 r i8 19 pa 25 o 28 NN sj 26 im fize NN is 27 5 128 a hz 28 m 128 Moo hs Apply Cancel 108 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 2724 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 MRSTP Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 46 on page 107 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root Switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except
99. 2 Chapter 42 Interface Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Enable ingress checking on the interface sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface ingress check 42 2 8 frame type Syntax frame type all tagged where all tagged u Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames or just ntagged gt tagged incoming frames on a port An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Enable ingress checking on the ports Enable tagged frame types on the interface sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface ingress check sysname config interface frame type tagged 42 2 9 weight Syntax weight wtl lt wt2 gt lt wt8 gt where wtl wt2 Sets the interface WFQ weighting A weight value of one to eight is lt wt8 gt given to each variable from wt 1towt 8 An example is shown next Enable WFQ queuing on the switch Enable port 2 and ports 6 to 8 for configuration Chapter 42 Interface Commands 293 ES 2724 User s Guide e Set the queue weights from QO to Q7 sysname configure sysname config wfq 42 2 10 egress set 42 2 11 sysname config interface port channel 2 6 8 sysname config interface weight 87654321 Syntax egress set lt port list gt where lt port list gt Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port based VL
100. 3 39 12 mvr Commands The following table lists the mvr commands in configuration mode 264 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 96 Command Summary mvr Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE mvr lt 1 Enters the MVR Multicast 13 4094 VLAN Registration configuration mode exit Exist from the MVR 13 configuration mode group lt name str gt Sets the multicast group range 13 start address for the MVR ip end address ip inactive Disables MVR settings 13 mode dynamic Sets the MVR mode dynamic 13 compatible or compatible name lt name str gt Sets the MVR name for 13 identification purposes no group Disables all MVR group 13 settings group lt name str gt Disables the specified MVR 13 group setting inactive Enables MVR 13 receiver port Disables the receiver port s An 13 lt port list gt MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN source port Disables the source port s An 13 lt port list gt MVR source port can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN tagged port Sets the port s to untag VLAN 13 list tags receiver port Sets the receiver port s An 13 lt port list gt MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN source port Sets the source port s An MVR 13 lt port list gt source port can send and
101. 3 destination to a station ip spanning tree Disables STP 13 lt port list gt Disables STP on listed ports 13 ssh key Disables the secure shell server 13 rsal rsa dsa encryption key Your switch supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication known hosts Removes the specified remote 13 host ip hosts from the list of all known hosts Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 253 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE known hosts Removes remote known hosts 13 lt host ip gt with the specified public key 1024 ssh 1024 bit RSA1 RSA or DSA rsa ssh dsa storm control Disables broadcast storm control 13 syslog Disables syslog logging 13 server ip Disables syslog logging to the 13 address specified syslog server server lt ip Enables syslog logging to the 13 address gt specified syslog server inactive type type Disables syslog logging for the 13 specified log type sys Link config error or report timesync Disables timeserver settings 13 trunk T1 T2 T3 T4 T Disables the specified trunk 13 5 T6 group T1 T2 T3 T4 T Removes ports from the specified 13 5 T6 trunk group interface port list T1 T2 T3 T4 T Disables LACP in the specified 13 5 T6 lacp trunk group vlan vlan id Deletes the static VLAN entry 13 vlaniq gvrp Dis
102. 30 igmp snooping leave timeout 30 igmp snooping unknown multicast frame drop 41 2 Configure IGMP Filter Use the following commands in the config mode to configure IGMP filtering profiles Syntax igmp filtering igmp filtering profile lt name gt start address lt ip gt end address lt ip gt where igmp filtering profile lt name gt start address end address Enables IGMP filtering on the switch Specifies a name up to 32 alphanumeric characters for this IGMP profile If you want to edit an existing IGMP profile enter the existing profile name followed by start address and end address parameters Specifies the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile IP address in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Specifies the ending multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile IP address in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting An example is shown next Enable IGMP filtering on the switch Create an IGMP filtering profile filter1 and specify the multicast IP addresses in the range 224 255 255 0 to 225 255 255 255 to belong to this profile sysname config igmp filtering sysname config igmp filtering profile filterl start address 224 255 255 0 end address 225 255 255 255 276 Cha
103. 36 ARP Table 227 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 125 ARP Table 172 21 100 153 172 21 207 247 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 5 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 100 ORAND Index IP Address 1 172 21 0 2 2 172 21 3 16 3 172 21 3 18 4 172 21 3 40 5 172 21 3 66 6 172 21 3 90 7 172 21 3 91 8 172 21 3 95 8 172 21 3 120 10 172 21 3 138 11 172 21 4 99 12 172 21 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 MAC Address 00 05 5d 04 30 f1 00 05 1c 15 08 71 00 0b cd 8c 6d ed 00 0 76 07 41 0d 00 50 8d 47 73 4f 00 05 5d f4 49 20 00 50 ba ad 55 7c 00 10 b5 ae 56 97 00 10 b5 ae 62 32 00 a0 5 b2 62 26 00 0c 76 09 cf 88 08 00 20 ad f6 88 00 80 27 be a2 8c 00 0 76 09 17 1a 00 a0 5 3f 91 56 00 85 a0 01 01 04 00 a0 c5 5e df 9 00 85 a0 01 01 00 Type dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic static dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 ARP Table manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the ARP Table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a switch port with corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the switch or static 228 Chapter 36 ARP
104. 4 Then the switch applies the port filter to finish the forwarding decision This means that frames may be dropped even if the SVLAN says to forward them Frames might also be dropped if they are sent to a CPE customer premises equipment DSL device that does not accept tagged frames 43 3 4 2 2 Untagged Frames 1 An untagged frame comes in from the LAN 2 The switch checks the PVID table and assigns a temporary VID of 1 3 The switch ignores the port from which the frame came because the switch does not send a frame to the port from which it came The switch also does not forward frames to forbidden ports 4 If after looking at the SVLAN the switch does not have any ports to which it will send the frame it won t check the port filter 43 3 5 Delete VLAN ID Syntax no vlan vlan id where lt vlan id gt The VLAN ID 1 4094 This command deletes the specified VLAN ID entry from the static VLAN table The following example deletes entry 2 in the static VLAN table sysname config no vlan 2 43 4 Enable VLAN Syntax vlan lt vlan id gt This command enables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 302 Chapter 43 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands ES 2724 User s Guide 43 5 Disable VLAN Syntax vlan vlan id inactive This command disables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 43 6 Show VLAN Setting Syntax show vlan This command shows the IEE
105. 45 It is possible though unlikely that someone may be trying to intercept your communication with this web site If you suspect the certificate shown does not belong to 192 168 1 1 please cancel the connection and notify the site administrator View Certificate Cancel Help 30 8 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection 204 Chapter 30 Access Control ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 110 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection MELZDIDIDERILIDGIISO E Fle Edt Yew Favorites Too Help Back gt OA A Qsearch ayFavortes Gmeda D DR St di Address nttp 192 168 0 1 rpSys html co Links Googe Search x9 Exoboded f Check v Autolnk C autoril Options Save Status Logout B Help System Up Time 0 53 43 Port Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s RxKB s Up Time Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 i Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 g Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00
106. 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 T Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 17 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 zl A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is saved in the configuration file from which the switch booted from and it stays the same even if the switch s power is turned off See Section 29 3 on page 190 for information on saving your settings to a specific configuration file C Click this link to go to the status page of the switch D Click this link to logout of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for al
107. 724 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary config vlan Commands continued list want to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE forbidden Specifies the port s you wantto 13 port list prohibit from joining this VLAN group help Displays a list of available VLAN 13 commands inactive Disables the specified VLAN 13 ip address lt ip address gt Sets the IP address of the switch 13 lt mask gt in the VLAN lt ip address gt Sets the IP address of the switch 13 mask manageable in the VLAN and allow remote management to this IP address default gateway Sets the default gateway IP 13 lt ip address gt address in this VLAN name lt name str gt Specifies a name for 13 identification purposes no fixed lt port list gt Sets fixed port s to normal 13 port s forbidden port Sets forbidden port s to normal 13 list port s inactive Enables the specified VLAN 13 ip address ip Deletes the IP address and 13 address mask subnet mask from this VLAN ip address Deletes the default gateway from 13 default gateway this VLAN untagged port Specifies the port s you want to 13 list tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID normal port Specifies the port s to 13 list dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP untagged port Specifies the port s you don t 1
108. 9 login 47 password 52 login account Administrator 198 non administrator 199 login accounts 198 configuring via web configurator 198 multiple 198 number of 198 login password 199 Index 335 ES 2724 User s Guide MAC Media Access Control 70 MAC address 70 227 maximum number per port 132 MAC address learning 74 89 97 132 specify limit 132 MAC table 223 how it works 223 viewing 224 maintanence configuration backup 192 firmware 191 restoring configuration 192 maintenance 189 current configuration 189 main screen 189 management 233 Management Information Base MIB 196 management interface See also CLI management port 95 MIB and SNMP 196 supported MIBs 197 MIB Management Information Base 196 MIBs 322 mini GBIC ports 41 connection speed 41 connector type 41 transceiver installation 41 transceiver removal 42 mirroring ports 117 modes and accounts 236 in command interpreter 236 monitor port 117 118 mounting brackets 36 MSA MultiSource Agreement 41 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 73 multicast 157 175 802 1 priority 159 and IGMP 157 and VLAN 175 configuration 175 IP addresses 157 overview 157 175 setup 158 159 vs unicast 175 vs broadcast 175 multicast group 161 multicast VLAN 165 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 103 Multiple STP 103 MVR 162 configuration 163 group configuration 165 network example 162 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 162 N natural mask subnets 327 network ID 326
109. AN An example is shown next Enable port based VLAN tagging on the switch Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Set the outgoing traffic ports as the CPU 0 seven 7 and eight 8 sysname config vlan type port based sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface egress set 0 7 8 qos priority Syntax qos priority 0 7 where 0 7 gt Sets the quality of service priority for a port An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Set the IEEE 802 1p quality of service priority as four 4 sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface qos priority 4 294 Chapter 42 Interface Commands ES 2724 User s Guide 42 2 12 name Syntax name lt port name string gt where lt port name string gt Sets a name for your port interface s An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Setaname for the ports sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface name Test 42 2 13 speed duplex Syntax speed duplex lt auto 10 half 10 full 100 half 100 full 1000 full gt where lt auto 10 half 10 Sets the duplex mode half or full and speed 10 100 or 1000 ODIO bol 100 Mbps of the connection on the port Selecting auto auto Se es negotiation makes one port ab
110. AN Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen 8 5 2 Static VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Section 8 1 on page 81 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 33 Static VLAN Details ED VLAN Detal g VLAN Status Port Number VID 2 4 s8 8 10 12 14 18 18 20 22 24 26 28 Elapsed Time Status i ES Ee Ee pac en Be Ee ee ee ed ujlo u u u ul u u u u u ul u l ou 1 3 22 07 Static Uu Uu U U u u Uu U U U U Uu Uu Uu The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Static VLAN Details LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLA
111. Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The switch forwards all packets on this port Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled 132 Chapter 17 Port Security ES 2724 User s Guide Table 40 Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Cli
112. All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer mapping Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next two fields to configure the priority level to physical queue The switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some de
113. CE ERR DEM EE eUE TO 205 30 10 Remote Management rS 206 Chapter 31 HiagnoStIG ssena A S S 209 OA DNAQHOSING EEEa 209 Table of Contents 15 ES 2724 User s Guide Chapter 32 Lip Pec E denis E E E A TA 211 acd Syalbg OVENI iinei S A 211 34 2 SYSIOG SEP sristi daia errana e EEA S 211 ery SO Servar SOUP eariad anien EERE EENAA to dato EARRA 212 Chapter 33 Cluster TANIA OTS Nt P 215 33 1 Clustering Management Status Overview eeseessssssersrssesrrrrrssserineeerrinnessees 215 33 2 Cluster Management Stalts scs rrr REL LU ER EEEE aa 216 33 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management eene 217 33 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch 218 33 3 Clustering Management Configuration ssse 219 Chapter 34 MAG taplo e 223 SUME AR ic MES 223 3412 Viowng dis MAD TODO uusssoxeeedibidiko iip rd d sert a ebd RR Hte eG aas 224 Chapter 35 IF E ouest SO Vac ivac DEMO NEA E ERIS HIR Aic ar de EE TUARS E FEE SERES ERG 6 225 ESNNIECICCCIN CIL m 225 soa Viewing ie IP PRI edu ons a dared eost d AR CU RR Urt a onec po 226 Chapter 36 BERE TRIB odis pucHasRt is EUN L A N E E E E AKT S eR T E T E 227 36 1 ARP Table COI MESTRE NMES 227 30 11 HOW ARP WOKS A os nA 227 36 2 Viewing the ARP Table audio ceasden Dope i ada pu da pon Vena dua aa adt 227 C
114. Control to go back to the Access Control screen Figure 102 Access Control SNMP il NP Access Control Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community Trap Destination Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 Access Control SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Get Community Enter the get community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Set Community Enter the set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station Trap Community Enter the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Trap Destination Enter the IP addresses of up to four stations to send your SNMP traps to Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 30 3 4 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the switch via web configurator at any one time An administrator is someone who can both view and configure switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administr
115. DHCP ES 2724 User s Guide 28 4 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information The switch can add information to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests You can also specify additional information for the switch to add to the client DHCP requests that it relays to the DHCP server Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the switch relays to a DHCP server The following lists the DHCP relay agent option 82 information that the switch sends to the DHCP server Slot ID 1 byte Port ID 1 byte VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes this is optional 28 4 2 Configuring DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Relay link to display the screen as shown Figure 91 DHCP Relay c DHCP Relay Status Active O Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information I Option 82 Information O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 DHCP Relay LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal nota
116. Displays the status of all VLANs 13 lt vlan id gt Displays the status of the specified 13 VLAN vlan stacking Displays VLAN stacking settings 13 vlaniq gvrp Displays GVRP settings 13 port isolation Displays port isolation settings 13 ssh lt 1 2 gt Connects to an SSH server with 13 user8 dest the specified SSH version ip Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 245 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 91 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE command Connects to an SSH server with 13 the specified SSH version and addition commands to be executed on the server traceroute lt ip host name gt Determines the path a packet 13 in band out takes to a device of band vlan lt vlan id gt ttl lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries 1 10 gt help Displays help information for this 13 command write memory Saves current configuration to the 13 configuration file the switch is currently using index Saves current configuration to the 13 specified configuration file on the Switch 39 11 3 General Configuration Mode The following table lists the commands in Configuration or Config mode Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE admin lt pw string gt Changes the administrator 14 password lt confirm string gt password bandwidth Enables bandwidth control 13 control bc
117. E 802 1Q Tagged SVLAN Static VLAN table An example is shown next VID is the VLAN identification number Status shows whether the VLAN is static or active Elap Time is the time since the VLAN was created on the switch The TagCt1 section of the last column shows which ports are tagged and which are untagged sysname show vlan The Number of VLAN 3 Idx VID Status Elap Time TagCtl 1 1 Static 0 12 13 Untagged 1 2 Tagged E 1 100 Static 0 00 17 Untagged Tagged 1 4 T1 2100 Static 0 00 07 Untagged 1 2 Tagged 3 8 Chapter 43 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 303 ES 2724 User s Guide 304 Chapter 43 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 44 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands This chapter shows you how to use Multicast VLAN Registration mvr commands 44 1 Overview Use the mvr commands in the configuration mode to create and configure multicast VLANSs Note If you want to enable IGMP snooping see Section 41 1 on page 275 44 2 Create Multicast VLAN Use the following commands in the config mvr mode to configure a multicast VLAN group Syntax mvr mvr mvr mvr mvr mvr mvr mvr mvr where vl lt v vl lt v vl lt v vl vl vl vlan id an id lan id gt an id gt lan id gt an id gt lan id gt an id gt an id gt an id gt source port lt port list gt receiver port l
118. EGULAR MAIL support zyxel no 47 22 80 61 80 www zyxel no ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 NORWAY sales zyxel no 47 22 80 61 81 0667 Oslo Norway info pl zyxel com 48 22 333 8250 www pl zyxel com ZyXEL Communications POLAND ul Okrzei 1A 48 22 333 8251 03 715 Warszawa Poland http zyxel ru support 7 095 542 89 29 www zyxel ru ZyXEL Russia RUSSIA Ostrovityanova 37a Str sales zyxel ru 7 095 542 89 25 Moscow 117279 Russia support zyxel es 34 902 195 420 www zyxel es ZyXEL Communications SPAIN Arte 21 5 planta sales zyxel es 34 913 005 345 28033 Madrid Spain support zyxel se 46 31 744 7700 www zyxel se ZyXEL Communications A S SWEDEN Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg sales zyxel se 46 31 744 7701 Sweden support ua zyxel com 380 44 247 69 78 www ua zyxel com ZyXEL Ukraine UKRAINE 13 Pimonenko Str sales ua zyxel com 380 44 494 49 32 Kiev 04050 Ukraine UNITED KINGDOM support zyxel co uk 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only www zyxel co uk sales zyxel co uk 44 1344 303034 ftp zyxel co uk ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK is the prefix number you enter to make an international telephone call Customer Support ES 2724 User s Guide Table of Contents irpo Pee HQ 1 Hle n c
119. ES 2 24 Intelligent Layer 3 Switch User s Guide Version 3 70 9 2006 ZyXEL ES 2724 User s Guide Copyright Copyright O 2006 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Copyright 1 ES 2724 User s Guide Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions
120. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer the default is 10000 milliseconds leaveall This command sets the switch s GARP timer settings including the join leave and leave all timers 298 Chapter 43 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values The following example sets the Join Timer to 300 milliseconds the Leave Timer to 800 milliseconds and the Leave All Timer to 11000 milliseconds sysname config garp join 300 leave 800 leaveall 11000 43 2 3 GVRP Timer Syntax show vlanlq gvrp This command shows the switch s GVRP settings An example is shown next sysname show vlanlq gvrp GVRP Support gvrpEnable YES sysname 43 2 4 Enable GVRP Syntax vlanlq gvrp This command turns on GVRP in order to propagate VLAN information beyond the switch 43 2 5 Disable GVRP Syntax no vlanlq gvrp This command turns off GVRP so that the switch does not propagate VLAN information to other switches 43 3 Port VLAN Commands You must configure the switch port VLAN settings in config interface mode Chapter 43 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 299 ES 2724 User s G
121. End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 157 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table Chapter 22 Multicast ES 2724 User s Guide 22 7 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN are able to receive the traffic
122. Factory Default Start Microsoft Internet Explorer X 32 Are you sure you want to load factory default 4 Cancel 3 In the web configurator click the Save button to make the changes take effect If you want to access the switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default switch IP address 192 168 1 1 29 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration Note Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the switch 190 Chapter 29 Maintenance ES 2724 User s Guide 29 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the switch 1 In the Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 96 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer xj 2 Are you sure you wa
123. Figure 75 MVR Configuration Example To configure the MVR settings on the switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 76 MVR Configuration Example OLD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active Vv Name Premium Multicast VLAN ID 200 Mode Dynamic C Compatible 0 e a 1 C E 2 rH 3 e LH 4 e e r 5 e rH e c gt Q xl To set the switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 Chapter 22 Multicast 167 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 77 MVR Group Configuration Example e 5 Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address Movie 23011 2 50 230 1 2 60 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 200 Oo News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 C Delete Cancel Figure 78 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Config MYR Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address poo 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 m News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Delete Cancel 168 Chapter 22 Multicast ES 2724 User s
124. IP VID PORT can sort the table based on the IP address VLAN ID or the port number iptable static Displays the static IP address 13 table protocol based _ Displays protocol based VLAN 13 vlan settings on the port s route Displays IP routing information 13 route static Displays IP static route 13 information tcp Displays IP TCP information 13 udp Displays IP UDP information 13 lacp Displays LACP Link Aggregation 13 Control Protocol settings logging Displays system logs 13 loginPrecedence Displays login precedence 13 settings logins Displays login account information 13 mac address table Displays MAC address table 13 lt all You can sort by MAC address VID mac vid port gt or port address table Displays static MAC address table 13 static mac aging time Displays MAC learning aging time 13 mac count Displays the count of MAC 13 addresses learnt mrstp tree Displays multiple rapid spanning 13 index tree configuration for the specified tree multicast Displays multicast settings 13 multi login Displays multi login information 14 mvr Displays all MVR settings 13 lt VID gt Displays the specified MVR group 13 settings policy Displays all policy related 13 information name Displays the specified policy 13 related information port access Displays all port authentication 13 authenticator settings port list Displays port authentication 13 settings on the specified port s port security Displa
125. K 22 ticeiio ertet dii peer dove euius 36 Chapter 3 Hardware OVerwIQW ciae icio YesksoKuo na VE Ra e n cane RAS AREAaE APA ERR A SEE ERENER AREORA 39 2T Panel CODIBCUDI S anuria aAa Pede np EAR bait ga Ln cin 39 WEE Js rr 40 3 2 Enorme PONS Seed ito o o na Ho bod b a e Tes Perr Per ea Perr ee Cnr sr rery 40 Table of Contents 9 ES 2724 User s Guide 21 2 T Dalt lt EIHOFHOE SOLIUS aesisesstamisepectn ppet aene EL PRI E Pe LEISR pP L ipd 40 vw etse Avr 41 3 1 3 1 Transceiver lnstellYlolk sicieisenscsses eoi d Irt aa PUE sehin tennan 41 21 5 2 Jeanscelver Removal 3axdseposeenstedi petet reat et bas cns 42 Zeer Ae Me MT 42 SNUMMI UNI Meu M 43 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector sessssssssss 43 i oe al Ret epee errr UN NER bid ERE dU iud rER DN M ER errr rm tr cer ME iUd 44 Chapter 4 The Web Conigurato s cosi rk ex e becpePecEP P kApP eu RP Pax PME IGE ECKE eR E da rd REGE 47 AT DIMUS 47 Loci i 0E MET 47 4a WG Situs Soeben sitera aind ennai edna 48 4 3 1 Change Your PSEEWORNI ossia epe Luth rbd thai e pa RARE Fe bad ad aka 52 24 Sung Your CONISIESDE serere rr bibo rese terere bero tenbHiao p v nt epe ev ORE EEEPUTRU S 53 ES MEPL E AN 53 46 Resetting the SWIEOEI aucem petet cia prn bir E ERE D REX AUI ERRARE SR une E LEER EPA dat 54 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File uscire ke cka re cor ev Ecce 54 4 7 Logging Out or the
126. N was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR 8 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the switch See Section 8 1 on page 81 for more information on static VLAN To configure a static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Chapter 8 VLAN 85 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 34 VLAN Static VLAN Port OHO HO HO DOD NM HN Si wn 9 VID I gt ED Static VLAN ND VLAN Status ACTIVE O VLAN Group ID REAN IONIAN INLINE PLU Og NC Name Control Tagging Normal gt M Tx Tagging Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging Add Cancel Clear Active Name Delete Yes 1 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 16 VLAN Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the
127. O Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority o Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging x None gt LH 1 e e oO 2 e I m 3 Ol DH 4 e e e O 5 e LH B e oO 7 e oO 8 e e e oO m m VLAN Active Add Cancel Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete pee prem The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 55 MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 with which the switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the switch 164 Chapter 22 Multicast ES 2724 User s Guide Table 55 MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some s
128. P or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Protocol Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Refer to Table 44 on page 139 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Address Address Prefix Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Destination IP Address Address Prefix Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switc
129. RADIUS server commands Specify the timeout period of 30 seconds that the switch will wait for a response from the RADIUS server Enable port authentication on ports 4 to 8 Activate reauthentication on the ports Specify 1800 seconds as the interval for client reauthentication sysname config radius server host 1 10 10 10 1 acct port 1890 key secretKey sysname config radius server timeout 30 sysname config port access authenticator sysname config port access authenticator 4 8 sysname config port access authenticator 4 8 reauthenticate sysname config 4 8 reauth period 1800 port access authenticator Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands 287 ES 2724 User s Guide 288 Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 42 Interface Commands These are some commonly used configuration commands that belong to the interface group of commands 42 1 Overview The interface commands allow you to configure the switch on a port by port basis 42 2 Interface Command Examples This section provides examples of some frequently used interface commands 42 2 1 interface port channel Use this command to enable the specified ports for configuration Indicate multiple non sequential ports separated by a comma Use a dash to specify a port range Syntax interface port channel lt port list gt An example is shown next Enter the configuration mode
130. Serv settings 13 garp Displays GARP information 13 hardware C F Displays current hardware monitor 13 monitor information with the specified temperature unit Celsius C or Fahrenheit F https Displays the HTTPS information 13 certificate Displays the HTTPS certificates 13 key rsa dsa Displays the HTTPS key 13 session Displays current HTTPS 13 session s timeout Displays the HTTPS session 13 timeout igmp filtering profile name Displays IGMP filtering profile 13 settings igmp snooping Displays global IGMP snooping 13 settings interface Displays current interface status 13 lt port number gt interfaces Displays current interface 13 config port configuration list bandwidth Displays bandwidth control 13 control settings bstorm control Displays broadcast storm control 13 settings egress Displays outgoing port information 13 igmp filtering Displays IGMP filtering settings 13 igmp group Displays the IGMP group limit 13 limited igmp immediate _ Displays the IGMP Immidiate 13 leave Leave setting ip Displays IP related information 13 arp Displays the ARP table 13 igmp Displays the IGMP setting 13 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 243 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 91 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE iptable all Displays the IP address table You 13
131. Table ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 37 Routing Table This chapter introduces the routing table 37 1 Overview The routing table contains the route information to the network s that the switch can reach The switch automatically updates the routing table with the RIP information received from other Ethernet devices 37 2 Viewing the Routing Table Status Use this screen to view routing table information Click Management Routing Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 126 Routing Table Status OEITUD EREUDKIUTIENNND Index Destination Gateway Interface Metric Type 1 192 168 1 0 24 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 1 STATIC 2 10 10 10 0 24 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 1 1 STATIC The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Routing Table Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number Destination This field displays the destination IP routing domain Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway device Interface This field displays the IP address of the Interface Metric This field displays the cost of the route Type This field displays the method used to learn the route RIP learned from incoming RIP packets or STATIC added as a static entry Chapter 37 Routing Table 229 ES 2724 User s Guide 230 Chapter 37 Routing Table ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 38 Configure Clone
132. The Ethernet port is negotiating in half duplex mode GBIC Slots LNK Green On The port has a successful connection Off No Ethernet device is connected to this port ACT Green Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data MGMT 44 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview ES 2724 User s Guide Table 2 LEDs continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION 10 Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet device On The port is connected at 10 Mbps Off The port is not connected at 10 Mbps or to an Ethernet device 100 Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet device On The port is connected at 100 Mbps Off The port is not connected at 100 Mbps or to an Ethernet device Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 45 ES 2724 User s Guide 46 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 4 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Win
133. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 116 Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 14 Mirroring This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens 14 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Chapter 14 Mirroring 117 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 51 Mirroring Limi Active T Monitor Port fi Port Mirrored Direction O Ingress Ingress TSH ngress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress ON Mi Ch amp Weh Ingress Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in
134. This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 38 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 127 Configure Clone L Configure Clone Source Destination Port Port Features Active Name Speeds Duplex BPDU Control Flow Control Intrusion Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control VLAN Stacking Port Security Broadcast Storm Control I Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol based VLAN Portbased VLAN Apply Cancel Basic Setting Advanced Application The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are copied Destination Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports Port which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports e 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Settin
135. VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID 86 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 2724 User s Guide Table 16 VLAN Static VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to
136. VR mode See the following example sysname config mvr 3 name multivlan sysname config mvr source port 2 3 5 receiver port 6 8 sysname config mvr mode dynamic sysname config mvr group ipgroup start address 224 0 0 1 end address 224 0 0 255 sysname config mvr exit 306 Chapter 44 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 45 Routing Domain Command Examples 45 0 1 interface route domain Syntax interface route domain lt ip address gt lt mask bits gt where lt ip address gt This is the IP address of the switch in the routing domain Specify the IP address is dotted decimal notation For example 192 168 1 1 mask bits The number of bits in the subnet mask Enter the subnet mask number preceded with a To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Use this command to enable create the specified routing domain for configuration An example is shown next Enter the configuration mode Enable default routing domain the 192 168 1 1 subnet for configuration Begin configuring for this domain sysname config sysname config interface route domain 192 168 1 1 24 cmd interface route domain 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0
137. WRR Weighted Round Robin wrr fe spq Q0 07 Sets the switch to use SPQ to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue You may want to configure weights for specific queues on the ports if you use WRR See the weight command example in Section 42 2 9 on page 293 An example is shown next Set the queueing method to SPQ sysname config spq 41 6 Static Route Commands You can create and configure static routes on the switch by using the ip route command 282 Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Syntax ip route ip mask lt next hop ip gt ip route ip mask next hop ip metric lt metric gt name lt name gt inactive where ip mask next hop ip metric lt metric gt name name inactive An example is shown next Specifies the network IP address of the final destination Specifies the subnet mask of this destination Specifies the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your switch The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be
138. Web Configurator ciii rri khoe i ho ri Lo Ert oed d 55 25 d i e 55 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example ieu sdsssuise nei veda uude vas ue e taa Ta ra Tuy aa 57 BW l1 ur mE 57 5 1 1 Configuring an IP RSIS scssi risens t eene sime eei E one ep a E atat 57 5 1 2 Configuring DACP Server Selling sce e rent ee tra ennc etant epit ett peus ttav 58 ed ed holes et VEAN eaii 59 mE Euer m 60 5 1 5 Enmgbling RIP icio i sia tbi pan rnc rba tx ie etr rtr Ebr Mie crdc DE r re E dde 60 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 11i tanta tha an ad arare eet aya kk Ea FRE RETR a Rhea aM A ESO 63 UT OPI assis tun teet ell sihi a osa iH e pSa A BE mata FUR ED PEN D IE OX FURIA RI LEES Esc 63 6 2 Por Salus SUMMAN snidiccasvnssducrsivarduereantinsdureantnradievaivarduecasareiiersamtnindieiaaraniues 63 6r pL5pDhs Por DOIS ne re eee ree ee emer irt iilos ad n Meet 64 Chapter 7 Basie cii e M 69 Pl CAVE ouis tid eda MM PH MEA EE 69 pau ocmilpu i cmt 69 TO OPNE GEWP eem 71 TA lnroducton to VLANS c asteren pe a e e iN 73 10 Table of Contents ES 2724 User s Guide EZ Res gegerngiit el pc 74 TOIROS f trm 75 TOA IF Menata T n 76 TPO DEEST Pen 78 Chapter 8 Ls M n 81 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 10 Tagged VLANS sei trino thm he bates nens 81 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames sees 81 8 2 Automatic VLAN Registra
139. a 168 Figure 78 MYR Group Configuration Example rore re prit abor RR RE ERE REnA 168 Figur T9 otc PROUD 1 sstixedodrniadd sec Len Mc na t demam e n ER REALE NIRE ESO 169 Figure Dn RIF secutus itd towne ten diesen tabdukets Moxdetentandbfen oqcu m cdbdln tede 172 great a 173 22 List of Figures ES 2724 User s Guide Figure S2 UP WMS aieaioscoxsbhxisenXbsLaMinne D p MAXEOARO ERMPRH NAAR IROL HS MERE 175 Figure 83 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field eeeseeeeeeeeeeee 177 Figure 84 DiffServ Network Example 1 2 err erret pertes 178 R LI ljBg D d 178 Figure 86 DiffServ DSGF Selling quuinteeneuaekeni nien enativiebeiese tobpeves eco in ebria 180 Figure 87 DHCP DACP Server Status cccccscsesenccestasisr cesses dutecoce er abe etae tet duca pr ricas 152 aD zEss3Ro nRuri 10 Mater 183 Figure 89 DHCP Server Network Example c ccccsssesccccesseesseccetenerteceentesceaneaneease 184 Figure 90 DHCP Server Configuration Example eene 184 Figure 9T DHCP Relay E 185 Figure 92 DHCP Relay Network Example sdssssccccscssesrcesrsseneccssssaesncacssaesnrccaseesteess 186 Figure 93 DHCP Relay Configuration Example eene 187 Figure S4 gp TT 189 Figure 95 Load Factory Default Start iuuenem ee roga er tette tidie reza 190 Figure 96 Reboot System Confirmation eese ennt nnn nna 191 Figure 97 FT Upgrade suseuintcmetdateeacitu
140. a Ete eco bd men omie is 315 46 9 Problems with the Password 14 cce i rot tt ont eti apto E e PEE ER edu Eo cas aT Appendix A Product Specifications c 319 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting ssisccsiiccieccstaicniccentessinecudsctavcedescedanusseiencanendinessteduase 325 qs d c eU MC Dt CD 333 Table of Contents 19 ES 2724 User s Guide 20 Table of Contents ES 2724 User s Guide List of Figures Figure 1 Backbone DDIIBSUDR soxdesiitsedie aea dde ala E FD Hard odd 31 PIQUE 2 Brid ing Application m 32 Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application 33 Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example esee 33 Figure gt lrcecnMbss da Gc 35 Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackets 36 Figure 7 Mounting the Switch on a Rack ssssssssseeee 37 Foue S FOAL FoG osaan 39 Figure 9 Transceiver Installation Example ccccccsccccceeseeccceceseeeccceeeseeecceeneneeees 41 Figure 10 Installed Transceiver MN tm 42 Figure 11 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example eeeeeeeeees 42 Figure 12 Transceiver Removal Example ccccssscccceessssccccerssssececeesseescceenenseeees 42 Figure 19 Rear Panel AC Modal isutetoqn kenn e ctu ppi vec b eee ePi acters 43 Figure 14 Rear Panel DG Modal iicet rores itio ertt itr tm nue i eee a 43 Figure 15 Web Configurator LOGIN uudssecena korr dern op e
141. able Commands Use the no command to disable features on the switch Syntax no spanning tree no mirror port Disables STP on the switch Disables port mirroring on the switch 41 4 2 Resetting Commands Use the no command to reset switch settings to their default values Syntax no https timeout Resets the https session timeout to default An example is shown next The session timeout is reset to 300 seconds sysname config no https timeout Cache timeout 300 41 4 3 Re enable commands The no command can also be used to re enable features which have been disabled Syntax no ip route ip mask inactive Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands 279 ES 2724 User s Guide where ip mask inactive Re enables an ip route with the specified IP address and subnet mask An example is shown next Enable the IP route with the IP address of 192 168 11 1 and subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 This ip route must have already been created and made inactive prior to re enable command being applied sysname config no ip route 192 168 11 1 255 255 255 0 inactive 41 4 4 Other Examples of no Commands In some cases the no command can disable a feature disable an option of a feature or disable a feature on a port by port basis 41 4 4 1 no trunk Syntax no trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 no trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 lacp no trunk T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 7 r6
142. ables GVRP on the switch 13 port isolation Disables port isolation 13 vlan stacking Disables VLAN stacking 13 password Change the password for Enable 14 mode 254 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE policy name classifier lt classifier list gt lt vlan lt vlan id gt egress port lt port num gt priority lt 0 7 gt dscp lt 0 63 gt tos 0 7 bandwidth lt bandwidth gt outgoing packet format tagged untagged out of profile dscp lt 0 63 gt forward action lt drop forward gt queue action lt prio set prio queue prio replace tos gt diffserv action diff set tos diff replace priority diff set dscp gt outgoing mirror outgoing eport outgoing non unicast eport outgoing set vlan metering out of profile action change dscp drop forward set drop precedence gt inactive gt Configures a policy A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 13 port access authentica tor Enables 802 1x authentication on the switch lt port list gt Enables 802 1x authentication on the specified port s reauthenticate Sets a subscriber to peri
143. above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed 7 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting and General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Chapter 7 Basic Setting 71 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 26 General Setup OES EAE NEN System Name Location Contact Person s Name Login Precedence Local Only hd Use Time Server when Bootup one it Time Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Time 00 J08 38 New Time hh mm ss 00 J08 38 Current Date 1970 jo1 01 New Date yyyy mm dd 1970 101 01 Time Zone UTC E It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name
144. ach port Click Advanced Application Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control 115 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 50 Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast Storm Contro Active C Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s T mm mT D ICHEDEEEBEDBEDBOEBmC Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast pkt s Select this option and specify the maximum number of broadcast packets the port can receive per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify the maximum number of multicast packets the port can receive per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify the maximum number of destination lookup failure DLF packets the port can receive per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory
145. adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group IGMP Querier Mode The switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Sw
146. ains do not overlap To change the IP address of the switch in a routing domain simply add a new routing domain entry with a different IP address in the same subnet Figure 28 IP Setup AED NEN Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Management in band C Outof band Management IP Address IP Address 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel IP Interface IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 VID Add Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Delete 1 192 168 1 12 255 255 255 0 1 O Delete 76 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 2724 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 1 254 Domain Name Server DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Management Specify which traffic flow In Band or Out of band the switch is to send packets originating from itself such as SNMP traps or packets with unknown source Select Out of band to have the switch send the packets to the management port labelled MGMT This means that device s connected to the other port s do not receiv
147. alf 100 full 1000 full gt Sets the duplex mode half or full and speed 10 100 or 1000 Mbps of the connection on the interface Selecting auto auto negotiation makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support 13 Spq Sets the port s to use Strict Priority Queuing 13 test Performs an interface loopback test 13 vlan stacking priority 0 7 Sets the priority of the specified port s in VLAN stacking 13 role access tunnel Sets the VLAN stacking port roles of the specified port s 13 SPVID lt 1 4094 gt Sets the service provider VID of the specified port s 13 vlan trunking Enables VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the switch 13 weight wtl lt wt2 gt lt wt8 gt A weight value of one to eight is given to each variable from wt 1 to wt 8 13 39 11 5 interface route domain Commands The following table lists the interface route domain commands in configuration mode 262 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Use these commands to configure the IP routing domains Table 94 interface route domain Commands
148. ame ES 2724 ZyNOS FW Version V3 7 O ARA 0 b0 09 01 2006 Ethernet Address 00 13 49 00 00 02 Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit C Y Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status MAC 33 5 34 0 26 0 85 0 Normal CPU 33 0 33 0 25 0 85 0 Normal PHY 30 5 30 5 25 0 85 0 Normal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN 6167 6392 6009 2750 Normal FAN2 6222 6222 5958 2750 Normal FAN3 6061 6167 5859 2750 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status VCOREA 2 592 2 592 2 592 10 Normal VINRO 1 264 1 264 1 264 10 Normal 3 3VIN 3 392 3 392 3 376 1 B Normal 12VIN 12 099 12 160 12 099 11 Normal 1 3VIN 1 328 1 344 1 328 i 10 Normal 1 25VIN 1 264 1 264 1 264 896 Normal 1 8VIN 1 856 1 856 1 856 1 10 Normal BPS 12VIN Absent The following table describes the labels in this screen Table8 System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the switch for identification purposes ZyNOS FW This field displays the version number of the switch s current firmware including the Version date created poris This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the switch ress Hardware Monitor Temperature The switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperatu
149. and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 151 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 66 VLAN Stacking Example A A VLAN 24 VEAN 28 N N aeree SPN A 37 24 N B 48 24 Nie Nasen VLAN 24 VLAN 24 P B 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by SP VID Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port 21 3 VLAN Tag For
150. andwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure RADIUS Remote Authentication Authentication Dial In User Service a protocol for user authentication that allows you to use external servers to validate an unlimited number of users Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the switch to group packets based on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VLAN stacking Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure various multicast features and create multicast VLANs IP Application Static Route This link takes you to screens where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually RIP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the RIP Routing Information Protocol direction and versions IGMP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IGMP setti
151. anges in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 123 ES 2724 User s Guide 124 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 16 Port Authentication This chapter describes the 802 1x authentication method and RADIUS server connection setup See Section 41 9 on page 285 for information on how to use the commands to configure additional Radius server settings as well as multiple Radius server configuration 16 1 Port Authentication Overview IEEE 802 1x is an extended authentication protocol that allows support of RADIUS Remote
152. are Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install and connect the switch 2 1 Freestanding Installation 1 Make sure the switch is clean and dry 2 Set the switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the switch These rubber feet help protect the switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 5 Attaching Rubber Feet Note Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 35 ES 2724 User s Guide 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Note Failure to use t
153. are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 22 on page 101 for more information Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 109 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 27 MRSTP Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 11 6 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 101 for more information on MRSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the switch Figure 48 MRSTP Status Tree zl Multiple Rapid Spanning Iree Protocol Status Configuration Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 0013496ad187 8000 0013496ad187 Hello Time second 2 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay
154. as all ports can freely communicate with each other 32 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application t 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANSs refer to Chapter 8 on page 81 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example rA goa See eee ew ee ee ee eee eee mmm mm Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 33 ES 2724 User s Guide 34 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 2 Hardw
155. ation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to 0x05ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Ethernet Type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN 90 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 2724 User s Guide Table 18 Protocol Based VLAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port Priority This field shows the priorit
156. ator password is 1234 Note It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 Chapter 30 Access Control ES 2724 User s Guide A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure switch settings Click Access Control from the navigation panel and then click Logins from this screen Figure 103 Access Control Logins Logins J Access Control Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm TO ees a eee ee rr rr S RM Dn j O AM RORIS r di ilia miS Fu SE ny Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Access Control Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users high
157. band management port default Sets the default gateway s IP 13 gateway lt ip gt address for the out of band management port name server lt ip gt Sets the IP address of adomain 13 name server route lt ip gt lt mask gt Creates a static route 13 next hop ip ip mask Sets the metric of a static route or 13 next hop ip deactivates a static route metric lt metric gt name lt name gt inactive lacp Enables Link Aggregation Control 13 Protocol LACP system priority 1 655352 Sets the priority of an active port 13 using LACP loginPrece LocalOnly Select which database the switch 13 dence LocalRADIUS should use first to authenticate RADIUSOn1ly gt a user logins username lt name gt Configures up to four read only 14 password lt pwd gt login accounts username lt name gt privilege lt 0 Assigns a privilege level to user 14 14 accounts Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 249 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE logout Exits from the CLI 13 mac aging 10 3000 Sets learned MAC aging time 13 time mac filter name name mac Configures a static MAC address 13 mac addr vlan port filtering rule vlan id drop src dst both inactive Disables a static MAC address 13 port filtering rule mac name name
158. ble mode type enable and enter the administrator password when prompted the default is 1234 When you enter Enable mode the command prompt changes to the pound sign 4 If you log into the command interpreter as an administrator you automatically enter Enable mode The following table describes command interpreter modes and how to access them Table 89 Command Interpreter Mode Summary HOW TO LOGIN MODE DESCRIPTION ACCESS PROMPT User Commands available in this mode are Default login level fora sysname gt a subset of enable mode You can read only account The first part of the prompt is the system name In the CLI examples in this User s Guide the system name is always sysname perform basic tests and display general system information Enable Commands available in this mode Default login level for sysname allow you to save configuration accounts with a settings reset configuration settings privilege of 13 or 14 as well as display further system Read only accounts information This mode also contains with a privilege of 0 the configure command which 12 need to type the takes you to config mode enable command and enter enable mode password 236 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 89 Command Interpreter Mode Summary continued MODE DESCRIPTION HOW TO LOGIN ACCESS PROMPT Config Commands available in this mode allow y
159. box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number E Settings in this row
160. c in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 113 Diagnostic ODE Tio Resolving 192 168 1 23 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful System Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address Ping Ethernet Port Test Port 1 Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test Chapter 31 Diagnostic 209 ES 2724 User s Guide 210 Chapter 31 Diagnostic ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 32 Syslog This chapter explains the syslog screens 32 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and s
161. ch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them Chapter 22 Multicast 157 ES 2724 User s Guide The switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch 22 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications and Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 22 1 on page 157 for more information on multicasting Figure 68 Multicast Status Multicast Status Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses 22 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications Multicast and the Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 22 1 on page 157 for more information on multicasting 158 Chapter 22 Multicast ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 69 Multicast Setting oNRumcrr
162. ck Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 17 Port Security 133 ES 2724 User s Guide 134 Chapter 17 Port Security ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 18 Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the switch 18 1 About the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data 1s equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps 1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows 2 Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 19 on page 141 to configure policy rules 18 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classi
163. cluster rcommand mac address Logs into the CLI of the specified cluster member Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 247 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE default in band out of Specifies through which traffic 13 management band gt flow the switch is to send packets dhcp relay Enables DHCP relay 13 helper address Sets the IP addresses of up to3 13 remote dhcp DHCP servers serverl gt lt remote dhcp server2 gt lt remote dhcp server3 gt information Allows the switch to add system 13 name to agent information option Allows the switch to add DHCP 13 relay agent information server vlan id starting 13 address lt ip addr gt lt subnet mask gt lt size of client gt diffserv Enables DiffServ 13 dscp lt 0 63 gt Sets the DSCP to IEEE 802 1q 13 priority 0 7 mappings exit Exits from the CLI 13 fe spq Sets the switch to use SPQ to 13 lt q0 ql service the subsequent queue s q7 gt after and including the specified queue for the 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports garp join lt 100 65535 gt Configures GARP time settings 13 leave lt msec gt leaveall lt msec gt help Displays help information 13 history Displays a list of previous 13 command s that you have executed hostname lt name_string gt Se
164. col ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 45 RSTP Configuration e rapid Spanning ree Frotoco Status Active ri Bridge Priority 32768 Helio Time ie 4 Seconds MAX Age 20 Seconds Forwarding Delay hs Seconds Port Active Priority Path Cost 1 Iv fize fis 2 Iz 8 fi 4 3 e fize i3 4 I ias fiz 5 r1 i8 fig 6 28 fig 7 EJ figs 8 ri i28 fi 9 9 fz28 fig 10 O a8 fi 3 11 i8 fis 12 C i28 fi 3 13 r1 ie8 fi 3 14 i28 fig 15 128 s 16 r ios is 17 128 fi E 18 r1 i8 fig 19 m 128 S 20 P 28 s 21 Ci 128 fi g 22 r1 i28 fig 23 r 128 9 24 h28 fig 25 Ci 128 4 26 O ies 4 27 D 128 4 28 m i28 _ 4 Apply Cancel Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 105 ES 2724 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 RSTP Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 46 on page 107 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root Switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list
165. configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth 20 1 1 Strictly Priority Strictly Priority SP services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 20 1 2 Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight portion the number you configure in the Weight field see Figure 18 1 when there is traffic congestion WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues By default the weight for QO is 1 for Q1 is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on Guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows
166. d displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 3 on page 102 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 65 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 7 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast transmitted Multicast This field shows the number
167. dIsvTancwbancics Ethernet device belongs out of band refers to the management port while in band means the other ports on the switch size 0 1472 Specifies the packet size to send ste Sends Ping packets to the Ethernet device indefinitely Press CTRL C to terminate the Ping process This command sends Ping packets to an Ethernet device The following example sends Ping requests to and displays the replies from an Ethernet device with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 sysname ping 192 168 1 100 sent rcvd rate Ttt avg mdev max min reply from 1 1 100 0 0 0 0 O 192 168 1 100 2 2 100 0 0 0 0 O 192 168 1 100 3 3 100 0 0 0 0 O 192 168 1 100 sysname 40 4 traceroute Syntax traceroute ip host name in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt ttl gt lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries lt 1 10 gt 270 Chapter 40 User and Enable Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide where ip host name The IP address or host name of an Ethernet device in band out of Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the band vlan vlan Ethernet device belongs id ttl lt 1 255 gt Specifies the Time To Live TTL period wait lt 1 60 gt Specifies the time period to wait queries lt 1 10 gt Specifies how many tries the switch performs the traceroute function This command displays information about the route to an Ethernet device The following example displays route
168. dcbxeb epu pest dock es vid bras nina L6 El CENE REV di 193 296 1 1 Example FTPGCOMTIDIBIOS 1 prep Fera tet ete nei Lead 193 29 8 2 FIP Command Line Procedure 5 retro pa s rra ne E 194 20 8 9 GUI based FTP CEMS 1usssoscccii vua ppt itp AEEEREELA FERREA ER RP Ax r 194 zu FIP RSS pappara i pr beb odas ARI UE OUR HAVE CERRO SEE MEER RE edat 194 Chapter 30 ier Lg CONO sect eaictacewes Seis ietne a caus dation 195 30 1 ACCESS Control OVEFVIGW ciisessiscossiwesdsecksaquertachaauesseiaricedienmncemiiemaenenvecraaee 195 30 2 Access Control Main Sereen s cierre Lime ina inidan E ERe Rea e ed ir PRX EN dw PE Ea 195 a ADUT SNMP f e 196 203 Vopr MIB 20 6 caves mee ala t ap p bias Pr RE c bti ode ER ERR 197 cu MEL Was eT es 197 suissexeniae irepl 198 30 3 4 Setting Up Login ACCOUN S cuasiestecm erts a oH P n AAs 198 CREE LER IU s p E 200 30 5 How SSH WORKS uitio tes ey vobi ub LIV iioii onie CER b Vt IS Uia 200 30 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch sssssssssssssseeeee 201 20 5 1 Requirements for Using SSH n ore tape roter Poder obere EE PR YER peus 202 30 7 mroduction to HTTPS inona 202 X REIS SHE cut NN TE 203 30 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages ecce nnne 203 30 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages sseeeee 203 30 8 9 he d beri S o o SET 204 30 9 Service Port Access COMO iussis einiietst beste pla seri iar HN ER EET MI
169. dence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Figure 83 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits DS 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 27 1 2 DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a simple DiffServ network consisting of a group of contiguous DiffServ compliant network devices Chapter 27 Differentiated Services 177 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 84 DiffServ Network Example Switch A marks traffic flowing into the network based on the configured marking rules Intermediary network devices 1 and 2 allocate network resources such as bandwidth by mapping the DSCP values and the associated policies 27 2 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to allow the switch to enable DiffServ and apply marking rules and IEEE802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s Click IP Application DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 85 DiffServ auicm DSCP Setting Active T Port Active m 1 rj 2 1 3 ri 4 5 O 6 1 7 8 O E NUI I NTT ENIAN AEE gg i
170. dows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the switch for example the default is 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen Figure 15 Web Configurator Login Enter Network Password I 2 xl D gt Please type your user name and password Site 192 168 1 1 Realm ES 2724 at Thu Jan 1 00 27 57 1970 User Name Password Save this password in your password list Cancel Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 47 ES 2724 User s Guide 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 16 Web Configurator Home Screen Status Save M Status El Logout B Help Port Status J B D E Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts En i ime x Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00
171. e broadcast limit 21 42 2 4 bandwidth limit The bandwidth limit command enables bandwidth control on the switch 290 Chapter 42 Interface Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Syntax bandwidth limit bandwidth limit pir Kbps bandwidth limit cir Kbps bandwidth limit egress Kbps where pir Kbps Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic cir Kbps Sets the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic egress Kbps Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic egress on the switch An example is shown next Enable port one for configuration Set the outgoing traffic bandwidth limit to 5000Kbps Set the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic to 4000Kbps Set the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic to 8000Kbps config interface port channel 1 config interface bandwidth limit egress 5000 config interface bandwidth limit cir 4000 config interface bandwidth limit pir 8000 sysname sysname sysname sysname 42 2 5 mirror The mirror command enables port mirroring on the interface Syntax mirror mirror dir lt ingress egress both gt where dir Enables port mirroring for incoming outgoing or both ingress egress both incoming and outgoing traffic Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis An example is shown next Enable port
172. e Refer to the section on IGMP snooping Index This field displays an index number of an entry Chapter 25 IGMP 173 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 59 IGMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Network This field displays the IP domain configured on the switch Refer to Section 7 6 on page 75 for more information on configuring IP domains Version Select an IGMP version from the drop down list box Choices are IGMP v1 IGMP v2 and None Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again 174 Chapter 25 IGMP ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 26 IP Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure the IP Multicast screen 26 1 IP Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast one sender to one recipient or Broadcast one sender to everybody on the network IP Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody You can configure the switch to untag remove the VLAN tags from IP multicast packets that the switch forwards This allows the switch to send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware 26
173. e Each port can belong to one STP tree only Figure 43 MRSTP Network Example 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Main Screen The switch allows you to configure a single RSTP configuration or you can configure multiple configurations See Section 11 1 on page 101 for more information on RSTP Click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to choose whether you want to configure multiple or a single Spanning Tree Protocol configuration Note This screen is only available if neither RSTP or MRSTP is active Once you select RSTP or MRSTP this screen displays the status of your configuration Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 103 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 44 Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and MRSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Click here MRSTP Click here The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Spanning Tree Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION RSTP This link takes you to the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol configuration screen See Section 11 3 on page 104 MRSTP This link takes you to the Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol configuration screen See Section 11 5 on page 108 11 3 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 11 1 on page 101 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol screen 104 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Proto
174. e IP Interface q 3 pU NM d nuum umm 1 Connect your computer to the MGMT port that is used only for management Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the MGMT port Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 57 ES 2724 User s Guide 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 0 1 the default MGMT port IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 47 for more information 3 Click Basic Setting and IP Setup e onum in the navigation panel 4 Configure the related fields in the IP Setup screen For the Sales network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask 5 In the VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this IP interface to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen 6 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the switch s power is turned Default Gateway Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Management Management IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway P Interface IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 in band C Outof band IP Address 182 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel IP Address 182 168 2 1 255 255 255 0 VID 2 Add Cancel IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Delete 192 168 1 12 255 255 255 0 1 rH Delete Cancel off 5 1 2 Config
175. e in ann 301 43 3 4 1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example eese 301 43 3 4 2 Forwarding Process Example 2 cccsessseeesesseneeeeeaeeeneeees 301 Ag d Delete YLAN ID 22iiiseauiscscrzexisb ordei beo boe e PUE PE EE 302 2034 EON VLAN oui edente trt EE ERE IE E tue EE LE pe E E ar goo EE A AERA 302 45 5 Disable YLAN a aae ecd iE EM Mem MM 303 55 how VLAN GOUNDO scaieierecr eet ra eoo debo Feel ri Eau Fa d i Lal d ER en ER UO 303 Chapter 44 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenee 305 COPI pc mm 305 44 2 Create Multicast VLAN qiuxsasdsseiissiusttetidde d oet bbedir Ecke bid Peer PAL bI EPI i 305 Chapter 45 Routing Domain Command Examples eese 307 45 01 ihiteffaco FOUTS HA OMI cci cia na S Enea nc b tb d LE RR Cc E Enni 307 Chapter 46 TrenblosoDOEHNQ auscecise eni tex RERXVER EXEENEGRENEDREMET RETE HIVER EKEEDEREUA FEVER TERVAREEURA FERRE KRRPRRNIE 309 46 1 Problems Starting Up the SWIEGI 1i oos roto are treo rir eto eeu Rene z apa errat t roen 309 45 2 Problems Accessing Die SICH iioii eren it RR EHI FD eno IE Ea e EFE andas 309 46 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 310 46 2 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers sssussssss 310 2525 12 Ja GIPS iuuiebetb ten Dite Mua Ue DRE oda a tee e UR VI E Plau siya 313 452 dud PCS SIONS x ccstoisitiviumei nt Ep
176. e then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 7 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each a
177. e these packets Select In Band to have the switch send the packets to all ports except the management port labelled MGMT to which connected device s do not receive these packets Management IP Address Use these fields to set the settings for the out of band management port IP Address Enter the out of band management IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation For example 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 0 254 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration IP Interface Use these fields to create or edit IP routing domains on the switch IP Address Enter the IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 This is the IP address of the switch in an IP routing domain IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of an IP routing domain in dotted decimal notation For Mask example 255 255 255 0 VID Enter the VLAN identification number to which an IP routing domain be
178. ee ek e eee PBIB RiB o gt e gt e BIBIBIB BR gt e 2 e PB bee bP BIRIBIB Ble ee e e BIRIBIBB e e e 2 PB Bbbbblbiblblbl gt 5 blblblblb e e e e k z 5 e e blblblblbl5 gt gt e e BREDE e b BIEE s gt gt e BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt 5 gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt bb gt gt gt e BIRIBIBIB gt gt gt gt gt RIBIRIBI gt lv a6 MMMM v VM a bje gt gt e gt BIRIRIBIB gt gt gt BIRIRIRIB gt gt bj ee e e BIR Bible gt gt e blblblblbl gt e e DARRER e e e HARRE gt 5 5 b Bb5bblblblblbl gt e e e DERDE e e e BIB e e e BIBIBIBIB e 2 e e e BBR B e e e eB e ee e bbbbbie 2 e e e BIBIRIBIB e e e eB b b e e BIRIRIR Re o gt gt blilblbib 2 bbb PB bIB BlblB gt gt gt e DERRE gt gt gt gt gt RIRIRIRIR gt blB Blblb gt gt gt e blblblblbl gt gt Blb blb b gt blB Blblb gt gt gt e blblblBlbl gt gt gt gt Blb blplb gt blb Blblb gt gt gt e Blblblblbl gt gt gt gt Blb blp b gt bibl gt gt gt gt RibIbIRIb gt 2 2 gt liil bob gt gt BIRIRIRIR gt gt gt gt gt BEREE gt e eee PBIB e e e e e ELILE gt e eee e pblblbib e blblblblbl n gt id Emme AE verre YT z MMM MIPIM ww x der vwvEEIEIEIE PRR RR RRR ROO AETERNE bb bbbbliblblblbls e gt bbb bb bbbbliblblblbls 2 5 blbibibib
179. eld to set the switch to broadcast and receive routing information 3 In the Version field select RIP 1 for the RIP packet format that is universally supported 4 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time x Active M Index Network Direction Version 1 172 23 19 95 24 Both RIP 1 2 192 168 1 1 24 Both RIP 1 a memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the switch s power is turned off Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 61 ES 2724 User s Guide 62 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 6 System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 6 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 6 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 23 Status c Port Status 3 Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s UpTime t Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 E Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 i Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down
180. en as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 101 for more information on RSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the switch Figure 46 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status a Rapid Spanning Iree Protocol Status Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Running Configuration Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 001 3496ad187 8000 001 3496ad187 Hello Time second 2 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 11 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to configure RSTP settings Refer to Section 11 3 on page 104 Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigu
181. ends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANS can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096
182. er privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see Chapter 39 on page 233 User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Chapter 30 Access Control 199 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 73 Access Control Logins continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 30 4 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 104 SSH Communication Example Internet SSH Server Sa SSH Client 30 5 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts 200 Chapter 30 Access Control ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 105 How SSH Works CN Internet Y 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The
183. est VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 21 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next Configure the fields as circled in the switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 49 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA _ Len Etype Data FCS Untagged Ethernet frame DA SA TPID Priority VID Len Etype Data FCS IEEE 802 1Q customer tagged frame DA SA SPTPID Priority VID TPID Priority VID Len Etype Data FCS Double tagged frame Table 50 802 1Q Frame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Etype Length and type of Ethernet frame SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol IDentifier Data Frame data VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 153 ES 2724 User s Guide 21 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications and then VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Figure 67 VLAN Stacking ORENEAN Active C sn YpE e 0x6100 j Others Hex Port Role Priority Normal 6 7 8 TUTTA aaa Access Port 0v Access Port x 0v Access Port j Oy AE HAEE paver Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen
184. et a REI ERE CK trabe 47 Figure 16 Web Configurator Home Screen Status sees 48 Figure 17 Change Administrator Login Password sse 53 Figure 18 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port ssessseeeess 55 Figure 19 Web Configurator Logout Screen eene nenne 55 Figure 20 Initial Setup Network Example IP Interface sess Br Figure 21 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN seen 59 Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID sssssseesseeeees 60 Gs E cb cii Rr 63 Figure 24 Slats Fort Delal rr 65 ROUES pg 70 Figure 26 General Setup RM 72 Figure uei svsssecavertnrczscisiaracissanaceguivsuccdiersenecddirvmecdivinaiieaiynnce 74 Fowo Z d ce i a a manna wile nmemnn ladles 76 Fao cs POL OOND esaa a 78 Figure 30 Port VLAN TrUNKING Pr i 83 Figure 31 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type ueeeeeeeeeeeseeeeenennnr rnnt nun inna 84 Figure 32 VLAN VLAN SIUS siiani edite asetepicia ohxsite Eu tM Rn PEE 84 Figure 23 Statie VLAN Detalle 0pcintrdd qax cena usc p a a e t as dai ea A RP YA 85 Figure 34 VLAN Statice VLAN oca on ean En eb e RR Ex a i aa 86 Figure 35 VLAN VLAN POR Setting auuescccsssnescercieise eret peer tutes aate oberste rh iaseresaees 87 Figure 36 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example ssssssssss 89 Figure 37 Protocol Based VLAN
185. ettings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays t
186. evious configuration 176 Chapter 26 IP Multicast ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 27 Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the switch 27 1 DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 27 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three prece
187. ew port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 30 10 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control Screen 206 Chapter 30 Access Control ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 112 Access Control Remote Management Entry Active 1 Iv 2 EH 3 O 4 0 Start Address End Address Telnet FIP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS oon Poo me WM Mw Fw NW NM VN onn T mes 1 mr B 0 0 0 0 O ooo 000 o pn nn n mn oo poo o n n nun np np OEIGUDIGBHEGERHNIT NN Secured Client Setup Access Co
188. face settings sysname show ip Out of band Management IP Address 192 168 0 1 Management IP Address IP 192 168 0 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 VID 0 IP Interface IP 192 168 1 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 VID 1 sysname gt 40 2 3 show logging Syntax show logging This command displays the system logs The following figure shows an example sysname show logging 1 Thu Jan 1 00 02 08 1970 PPO5 WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 2 Thu Jan 1 00 03 14 1970 INFO adjtime task pause 1 day 3 Thu Jan 00 03 16 1970 PPOf WARN SNMP TRAP 26 Event On Trap 4 Thu Jan 00 03 16 1970 PINI WARN SNMP TRAP 1 warm start 5 Thu Jan 00 03 16 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 6 Thu Jan 00 03 16 1970 PINI INFO main init completed 7 Thu Jan 1 00 00 13 1970 PP26 INFO adjtime task pause 1 day 8 Thu Jan 1 00 00 14 1970 PPOf WAR SNMP TRAP 26 Event On Trap 9 Thu Jan 00 00 14 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 0 cold start 10 Thu Jan 00 00 14 1970 PINI INFO main init completed 11 Thu Jan 00 00 04 1970 PPO5 WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 11 Thu Jan 1 00 00 04 1970 PPO5 WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up Clear Error Log y n Note If you clear a log by entering y at the Clear Error Log y n prompt you cannot view it again 40 2 4 show interface Syntax show interface port number 268 Chapter 40 User and Enable Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide This command displays s
189. fault DSCP IEEE802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 548 55 56 63 IEEE802 1P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 27 3 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Chapter 27 Differentiated Services 179 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 86 DiffServ DSCP Setting ojo v alt zl 16 2 7 24 3 v 32 4 v 40 5 v 49 6 v sej v NE DSCP to 802 1p Mapping 1 0 v s zl 17 2 v 25 3 v 33 4 sfs gt 49 6 v sj ifo ofi 19 2 gt ae 3 34 4 v 42 5 sofe v se v s o ufi 19 2 gt a3 as 4 v 43 5 gt 51 6 v s v sox 12 1 20 2 2e 3 se 4 MoE saje x eo z soz fiz a2 29 3 37 4 as 5 v sa 6 v ei 7 6 0 v 22 2 30 3 asja v 46 5 v 546 v e2 Diffserv 7 0 s is gt ajz ahr ae 4 v 475 gt 556 v 63 7 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 DiffServ DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 Thisis the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link
190. fic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C Figure 36 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 8 7 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN Click Protocol Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Chapter 8 VLAN 89 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 37 Protocol Based VLAN ED Frotocol Based VLAN NENNP Active O Port Name c Ha Ethernet type c others Hex VID Priority o Index Active Ada Cancel Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port to be included in this protocol based VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 8 on page 81 for more details on setting up VLANs Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN Ethernet type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal not
191. fiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 19 on page 141 Click Advanced Application and Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Chapter 18 Classifier 135 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 59 Classifier Classifier g Active C Name Packet Format all VLAN of Priority AM c fox H O all j Ethernet Type Giles mmm ies Layer 2 G Any MAC Address c uel M uH Hu B j G Any Port c Destinati MAC Address indie 4 estination mac LE h kD RE kE DSCP zi Cc c all I Establish Only IP Protocol C Others Dec IP Address ooo 0 0 0 0 Address Prefix f Socket Numb 0 ANY ocket Number Ps IP Address jogoo Address Prefix 1507 G Any Socket Number oc um c 1 Layer 3 Source Destination Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes Packet Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 untagged Format Ethernet II tagged and Ethernet Il untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802 3 standards A va
192. figuration to 13 running config interface port channel port lt port list gt Clones copies the attributes from 13 the specified port to other ports running config interface port channel port lt port list gt bandwidth limit Copies the specified attributes 13 from one port to other ports tftp config index lt ip gt remote file Restores configuration with the 13 specified filename from the specified TFTP server to the specified configuration file on the router Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 241 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 91 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE flash ip Restores firmware via TFTP 13 lt remote file gt disable Exits Enable or privileged mode 13 enable Accesses Enable or privileged 13 mode erase running config Resets to the factory default 13 settings interface port Resets to the factory default 13 channel lt port settings on a per port basis and list optionally on a per feature bandwidth configuration basis limitis exit Exits Enable or privileged mode 13 help Displays help information 13 history Displays a list of command s that 13 you have previously executed igmp flush Removes all IGMP information 13 kick tcp session Disconnects
193. for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number P Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value
194. g ES 2724 User s Guide APPENDIX A Product Specifications This section describes the general software features of the switch Table 100 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION IP Routing Domain An IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port Configure an IP routing domain to allow the switch to route traffic between different networks VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router VLAN Stacking Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers MAC Address Filter Filter traffic based on the source and or destination MAC address and VLAN group ID DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the switch assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network IGMP
195. g Select which port settings you configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Chapter 38 Configure Clone 231 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 88 Configure Clone continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Advanced Select which port settings you configured in the Advanced Application menus Application should be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 232 Chapter 38 Configure Clone ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 39 Introducing Commands This chapter introduces commands and gives a summary of commands available 39 1 Overview In addition to the web configurator you can use commands to configure the switch Use commands for advanced switch diagnosis and troubleshooting If you have problems with your switch customer support may request that you issue some of these commands to assist them in troubleshooting Note See the web configurator parts of this User s Guide for background information on features configurable by the web configurator 39 2 Accessing the CLI You can use a direct console connection or Telnet to access the command interpreter on the switc
196. g Support port mirroring per IP TCP UDP Bandwidth control Supports rate limiting at 64K increment Appendix A Product Specifications 321 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 101 General Product Specifications continued Layer 3 IP Capability IPV4 support Features 8 IP routing domains 4K IP address table Wire speed IP forwarding Routing Unicast RIP V1 V2 protocols Multicast IGMP V1 V2 Static Routing IP services DHCP server relay Security IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Static MAC address filtering Limiting number of dynamic addresses per port Table 102 Management Specifications System Control Alarm Status surveillance LED indication for alarm and system status Performance monitoring Line speed Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events Throughput monitoring Port mirroring and aggregation IGMP snooping Firmware upgrade and download through FTP TFTP DHCP server relay Login authorization and privilege levels Self diagnostics FLASH memory Network Management CLI through console port and Telnet Web based management Clustering up to 24 switches can be managed by one IP address SNMP RMON groups history statistics alarms and events MIB RFC1213 MIB II RFC2011 IP MIP RFC2012 TCP MIB RFC2014 UDP MIB RFC1493 Bridge MIB RFC1643 Ethernet MIB RFC1757 Four groups of RMON RFC2674 Bridge MIB extension 322 Appendix
197. g request to an Ethernet device 0 240 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 90 Command Summary User Mode continued ip version COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE lt IP host name gt vlan Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device in the 0 lt vlan id gt specified VLAN s with the specified parameters size lt 0 1472 gt t help Displays command help information 0 tracerout lt ip host name gt Determines the path a packet takes to a device 0 e lt ip host name gt Determines the path a packet takes to a device ina 0 vlan lt vlan id gt VLAN ttl lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries lt 1 10 gt help Displays command help information 0 ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH O 39 11 2 Enable Mode The following table describes the commands available for Enable mode Table 91 Command Summary Enable Mode tftp lt ip gt lt remote file gt the specified TFTP server with the specified file name COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE baudrate Changes the console port speed 13 112131415 Choices are 1 9600 2 19200 gt 3 38400 4 57600 and 5 115200 boot config lt index gt Restarts the system with the 13 specified configuration file configure Accesses Configuration mode 13 See Section 39 11 3 on page 246 copy running config Backs up running con
198. ga tier d cecuiedieccenctaniyet pieectupiend sala bided ieee eae 224 Table 85 JP Table nuran a e Fed a Fx i eU oc LR E RARE adits 226 Bo i gy uro mm aE E cain creeds 228 Table 87 Routing Table SIGS iuuccsiseecensseseteteresesecce ct ensen ee cor na 229 Table 89 Conigure CONE 2 cT 231 Table 89 Command Interpreter Mode Summary eee 236 Table 90 Command Summary User Mode iei tn hd ntn ot et ra 240 Table 91 Command Summary Enable Mode see 241 Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode sees 246 Table 93 interface port channel Commands ssssseeeeeen 259 Table 94 interface route domain Commands sss 263 Table 95 Command Summary config vlan Commands sess 263 Table 96 Command Summary myr Commands 2 265 Table 97 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch sseeeessess 309 Table 98 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch sessseeeesee 309 Table 99 Troubleshooting the Password eeeeeuesseissee tentiam tenta 317 Table 100 Firmware Features t 319 Table 101 General Product Specifications eiit tron raa osten 321 Table 102 Management Specifications c ccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeceeeeeeeeeeess 322 Table 103 Physical and Environmental Specifications cecceceeeeeeeeeeeees 323 Table 104 Classes Of IP Addresses
199. ge 90 Figure 38 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example sssesss 91 List of Figures 21 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 39 Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected seeeee 93 Figure 40 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation sees 94 Figure 41 Static MAC Forwarding 2cesicieecettt rr eret better ette bc vr adds 98 Figur 7 FIENO Mere PrP reo Pen dex eeu Oeo e On Og bsc n Ter ORO dt RR d 99 Figure 43 MISSTP Network EXample iac be eire ER DE Y qA SER PELI ek er enn vu rH E OET Yn gk uada 103 Figure 44 Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and MRSTP eee 104 Figure 45 RSTP Configuration 21seececucskorxccntit nope nhan orc n LIU ad ANENE oO C KERPP Cn EN 105 Figure 46 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status 107 Figure 47 MRSTP Configuration odio et n ope e rra do c a rea RN 108 Figure 48 MRS TP Status MT CI 110 Figure 49 Bandwidth COMWO sicsiicccasucesnecauacseurccaveesinecdavenuerecsureusineeasvenumndauareeneeds 114 Figure 50 Broadcast Storm LOU cscerssssceceserssnnsderaasarsansnasacavasanweseaenniosssaasnsness 116 a le S i iE SS D OE 118 Figure 52 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status ssseeess 121 Figure 53 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration 122 Faure S4 RADIUS Seal dcsnmindbii anan NNR 125 Figure 55 Port Authentication n inaa NA 127 Figure 56 Port Authentication RADIUS sse ior ra tarn ko dae 127 Fi
200. gt interface port list where T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Disables the trunk group T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Disables LACP in the trunk group lacp T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 Removes ports from the trunk group interface lt port list gt An example is shown next Disable trunk one T1 Disable LAPC on trunk three T3 Remove ports one three four and five from trunk two T2 sysname config no trunk T1 sysname config no trunk T3 lacp sysname config no trunk T2 interface 1 3 5 280 Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide 41 4 4 2 no port access authenticator Syntax no port access authenticator no port access authenticator lt port list gt reauthenticate no port access authenticator lt port list gt where Disables port authentication on the switch lt port list gt Disables the re authentication mechanism on the listed port s reauthenticate lt port list gt Disables authentication on the listed ports An example is shown next Disable authentication on the switch Disable re authentication on ports one three four and five Disable authentication on ports one six and seven Figure 128 no port access authenticator Command Example sysname config no port access authenticator sysname config no port access authenticator 1 3 5 reauthenticate sysname config no port access authenticator 1 6 7 41 4 4
201. guration form a file browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen below from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 29 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 99 Backup Configuration OLATI Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 192 Chapter 29 Maintenance ES 2724 User s Guide 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer 29 8 FTP Comma
202. gure 57 Port Authentication BOZAK iius b ttr tritt debe berto bte dr dde 128 Fitts Se 2g c joa RE 132 Fae toes CaS OT eee ET 136 Figure 60 Classifier Summary Table iaceo roter taut e rtm mue iisi sans ure tune kon 138 Figure 61 Classifier EXIIDDIEE aicsoaenoduetecnmet septi Gave Pit ex Hort i EROR hut dua pi 140 Bt gs oad cae e srana tea teren teeer pret sateen tree eren St rerremerrrrect te trerr tn Tr rttrr 142 Figure 63 Policy Summary Tablo iuusiisosesasxesdexeduxsesdenisboctud apte pA REP ita adi 144 Figure 64 Policy Example astuiatosxccteniedetene aaa Ex ona dates Le eee 146 Figure 65 Queuing Method e 149 Figure 66 VLAN Stacking EX MplS 12 1 canere a rn a n a LES ida 154 Foue e VLAN ce m 154 Figure 68 Multicast Salus iP 158 Figure 69 Multicast DOE 12 ioodctee px ER POCHE Ee Rd aa o RI CR a 159 Figure 70 Multicast Setting IGMP Filtering Profile 161 Figure 71 MYR CeO EXBITWEQ iuescecisccsx qe opt A SERM AXE RD AK EX VRBE ARR ON ASA d 162 Figure 72 MVR Multicast Television Example seee 163 Figure 73 Multicast Setting MYR ics iere det rette deti cede cde 164 Figure 74 MVR Group GCODDUUEAUDIT 1 oos ron d get airo tS OR Ga d 166 Figure 75 MYR Configuration Exaile 12 erp terr ope rr EX Erro YPF Etr a 167 Figure 76 MVR Configuration Exemple 222 o enciieer emet rh tmu teer thao apt vonmeresnes 167 Figure 77 MVR Group Configuration Example eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee etn
203. h Note The switch automatically logs you out of the management interface after five minutes of inactivity If this happens to you simply log back in again By default multiple command interpreter management session are allowed via either the console port or Telnet However no more than five concurrent login sessions are allowed Use the configure multi login command in the configuration mode to limit concurrent logins to one Console port access has higher priority 39 2 1 The Console Port Connect to the switch s console port using a terminal emulation software configured to the following settings VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits e 1 stop bit No flow control Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 233 ES 2724 User s Guide 39 2 1 1 Initial Screen When you turn on your switch it performs several internal tests as well as line initialization You can view the initialization information using the console port After the initialization the login screen displays refer to Section 39 3 on page 234 Copyright c 1994 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corp initialize mgmt ethernet address 00 13 49 00 00 01 initialize switch ethernet address 00 13 49 00 00 02 Initializing switch unit 0 Initializing VLAN Database Initializing IP Interface Initializing Advanced Applications Initializing Command Line Interface Initializing Web Interface Press ENTER to conti
204. h Control Setup Click Advanced Application and then Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control 113 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 49 Bandwidth Control e Bandwidth Control Active L1 Port Ingress Rate Active Egress Rate Active Commit Rate Active Peak Rate O Kbps O Kbps O Kbps 1 i kops O MO ks r fi kps 2 C 1 Kbps m fi Kbps D 1 Kbps 3 m fi Kbps n fi Kbps w 1 Kbps 4 C fi Kbps 0 fi Kbps a 1 Kbps 5 O n Kbps m Kbps m hi Kbps 6 m 1 Kbps m f Kbps r kps 7 Mo lks kbps r ftps 8 f Kbps Li fs kbps m f kops Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 29 Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Commit Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the Rate incoming traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate T
205. h host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 for example Therefore to determine the total number of hosts allowed in a network deduct two as shown next A class C address 1 host octet 8 host bits can have 28 2 or 254 hosts A class B address 2 host octets 16 host bits can have 216 _ 2 or 65534 hosts A class A address 3 host octets 24 host bits can have 274 2 hosts or approximately 16 million hosts IP Address Classes and Network ID The value of the first octet of an IP address determines the class of an address Class A addresses have a 0 in the leftmost bit Class B addresses have a 1 in the leftmost bit and a 0 in the next leftmost bit Class C addresses start with 1 1 0 in the first three leftmost bits Class D addresses begin with 1 1 1 0 Class D addresses are used for multicasting which is used to send information to groups of computers There is also a class E It is reserved for future use The following table shows the allowed ranges for the first octet of each class This range determines the number of subnets you can have in a network Table 105 Allowed IP Address Range By Class CLASS ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET BINARY SCTETIS CIM Pen OEEIRST Class A 00000000 to 01111111 0 to 127 Class B 10000000 to 10111111 128 to 191 Class C 11000000 to 11011111 192 to 223 Class D 11100000 to 11101111 224 to 239 Class E 11110000 to 11111
206. h loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Chapter 18 Classifier 137 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 41 Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Note When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over lower layer rule Figure 60 Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 1i Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 Ci Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only Rule This field displays a summary of
207. hapter 37 ass ODDEELI A HEN 229 OP A rU en 229 37 2 Viewing the Routing Table Stats 1d tat ei e eet nera ea 229 Chapter 38 CONNIF CONG M EE T 231 eh Coes CHONG espe smnnmes a aade canta eoe eae 231 Chapter 39 Int cducihg Command S uin cue d eig eka oak e neus ducdME Rae EeRavE pe DEM RN da 233 CREE S E E APR Eme 233 cca es sind Me CU cnn 233 16 Table of Contents ES 2724 User s Guide cose ciescul i M M 233 ete te A MINE o Mene E A O EATA EET 234 SKNDI NEIS DESSIN cm 234 394 Command Syntax Corneltblfe 1 5 co pert Uu apa ona da don a a vet ae oda 234 vun Changing the Pass cueste coc meni ERE RP Dead i e keen e ut nae bubus 235 39 0 Privilege Levels 235 xi Wake ao e o a A Un RU P 236 HO Cog UNO a aas seo E EE E EE E E E IN ERE RR 237 39 8 1 List of Available Commands uen tm ere a pros e s eS slowed 238 39 9 Using Command HIStory uiia cathe petatikt idea bra tud aded ped a iube fetu Pepe RPRDE id qdE 239 39 10 Saving bier disait 239 39 TOT Switeh Configuration FIRE 1 455 pret PIE o REOR RPRI ERE nanna 239 FN Nass DE qe 240 simus iate 240 LIU ocv ITE 240 ci edipi A ci e e 241 39 11 23 General Configuration Mode 1 orte rt terret pret presi neas 246 39 11 4 interface port channel Commands sss 259 39 11 5 interface route domain Commands esee nnne 262 29 11 5 porou
208. hase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer w
209. he sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port Peak Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 114 Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 13 Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 13 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on e
210. he command line interface CI command e The symbol means or e The entry cr in the command lines refers to carriage return Press ENTER or carriage return after a command to execute the command Use the up or down arrow key to scroll through the command history list You may enter a unique part of a command and press TAB to have the switch automatically display the full command For example if you enter config and press TAB the full command of configure automatically displays Each interface refers to an Ethernet port on the switch Commands configured after the interface command correspond to those ports e Type multiple ports or port ranges separated by a comma Ranges of port numbers are typed separated by a dash 39 5 Changing the Password This command is used to change the password for Enable mode By default the same password is used to enter the command line interface CLI and Enable and Config modes of the CLI The password you change with this command is required to enter Enable and Config modes of the CLI Syntax password lt password gt where password password Specifies the new password up to 32 alphanumeric characters users have to type in to enter Enable and Config modes 39 6 Privilege Levels You can use a command whose privilege level is equal to or less than that of your login account For example if your login account has a privilege level of 12 you can use
211. he need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the switch See Chapter 17 on page 131 for more information on port security Click Advanced Applications Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup 97 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 41 Static MAC Forwarding Static MAC nnnm Active Name MAC Address VID Port Index Active z Lk EE E E E Add Cancel Clear Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the switch s run time memory The switch loses this rule if it is tur
212. he priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 22 7 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen Note A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Chapter 22 Multicast 165 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 74 MVR Group Configuration GOES E T NN Multicast VLAN ID x Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group z F4 kaj Delete Cancel i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from the drop VLAN ID down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 157 for more information on IP multicast addresses
213. he proper screws may damage the unit 2 2 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the switch Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackets peco 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the switch 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the switch 4 You may now mount the switch on a rack Proceed to the next section 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack 36 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 7 Mounting the Switch on a Rack a i5 u D oj O l o D ol n ri D E m 3 p ol ol pl 0 a D E 9 i E yat y D f o 2l nN n 2l v AE o B ae D J Dj z D 2l DI Li D B indc D sl D D D ui
214. he switch Table 36 Supported VSA FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 ZyXEL Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate decimal Egress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 ZyXEL Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate decimal Privilege Assignment Vendor ID 890 ZyXEL Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from O to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the switch uses first for user authentication 16 1 1 2 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server to assign a port on the switch to a VLAN fixed untagged This will also set the port s VID Refer to RFC 3580 for more information Table 37 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Type 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the switch 16 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate IEEE802 1x security both on the switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings
215. hentication RADIUS 802 1x Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast Multicast Setting Multicast Status IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Group Configuration RIP IGMP IP Multicast DiffServ DSCP Setting DHCP Server Status DHCP Server DHCP Relay ADVANCED BASIC SETTING APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT System Info VLAN Static Routing Maintenance Firmware Upgrade Restore Configuration Backup Configuration Load Factory Default Save Configuration Reboot System Access Control SNMP Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Diagnostic Syslog Syslog Setup Server Setup Cluster Management Status Configuration MAC Table IP Table ARP Table Routing Table Configure Clone The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 5 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the switch 50 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 2724 User s Guide Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning IGMP snooping GARP and prior
216. hown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID 186 Chapter 28 DHCP ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 93 DHCP Relay Configuration Example DOP Relay Active Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information Status Iv 192 168 1 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M Option 82 m GS 4012F Apply Cancel Chapter 28 DHCP 187 ES 2724 User s Guide 188 Chapter 28 DHCP ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 29 Maintenance This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 29 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 94 Maintenance OMAR Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Config 2 Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field d
217. ications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Thank you 30 Preface ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 1 Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the switch 1 1 Introduction The ES 2724 is a stand alone layer 3 Ethernet switch with 24 10 100Mbps ports two RJ 45 Gigabit ports for stacking and 2 GbE dual personality interfaces for uplink as well as a console port and a management port for local management A dual personality interface includes one Gigabit port and one slot for a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module with one port active at a time With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the switch is easy In addition the switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management See Appendix A on page 319 for a full list of software features available on the switch 1 1 1 Backbone Application The switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future The switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers and servers directly to the switch s port or connect other switches to the switch In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print
218. ice telnet ftp http to manage the switch icmp snmp gt router igmp Enables and enters the IGMP 13 configuration mode exit Leaves the IGMP configuration 13 mode rip Enables and enters the RIP 13 configuration mode exit Leaves the RIP configuration 13 mode service ftp socket Allows FTP access on the 13 control number specified service port http socket Allows HTTP access on the 13 number timeout specified service port and defines the timeout period https socket Allows HTTPS access on the 13 number specified service port 256 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE icmp Allows ICMP management 13 packets snmp Allows SNMP management 13 ssh socket Allows SSH access on the 13 number specified service port telnet socket Allows Telnet access on the 13 number specified service port snmp contact system Sets the geographic location and 13 server contact gt the name of the person in charge location lt system of this switch location gt get community Sets the get community 13 property set community Sets the set community 13 property trap community Sets the trap community 13 property trap destination Sets the IP addresses of up to 13 Kip four stations to send your SNMP traps to spa
219. icecciiedecticiadiedcentusiasssaiovateeneenezenteas 177 BT oe POR UN ED DINGO his calc castes s 178 27 3 DSCPde IEEESUZ 16 Ponty SellligS crciasierorsicctssaneictaupanpiinadasseledcagasannans 179 239 1 LHI OSCR SEU serisinin 179 Chapter 28 EF recen eren RTT 181 201 DHCP CNOT Aet 181 VENE o P 181 2 DHCP SOPISI BIDS araida Eripe Pa C L a DM ERR XR E EE EDU E AA A I AEEA 181 Pim Comidurmg DHCP x nh OSER 182 28 3 1 DHCP Server Configuration Example 1 rtr rr rere eda 184 20A DHCP PIS uucunisiuesxod enata a epu tinae dbi 184 28 4 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information 222 acero retta tr aae n rotta p pieiee 185 14 Table of Contents ES 2724 User s Guide 20 4 2 Lonmguring DACP Relay sssrinin rsin N 185 28 4 3 DHCP Relay Configuration Example eene 186 Chapter 29 Puy LUTE URNS M terme 189 29 1 TRE Maintenance SOIBSOI asicccijecinsecisreessscesdenerseanrgemmsaciagesaseierseanswecssenusenaais 189 29 2 Load Factory DersulE 4o ibrnd aedes bb dd Dig bead a c AGE UR bad Dir FERAE E aA Ru 190 prs xcr amari Mcr e 190 AE TTO E Me Em 191 dirus pfe x EE M 191 29 6 Restore a Configuration FIG iuiccsieseecc ceres ce bri mia a eo rra pne peek aie eue eiras 192 29 7 Backup GonPgM Bor FIG asserens rep RE PO EE a HER apta 192 20 8 FIF Command LINE io ssi rd EFE RE MEE I equ tas bei EORUM NO UM ERN 193 28 8 1 Filename Conventions uuuekeissccen
220. ido ESPERTI RN QU E EA EP MEER ET COP Teer 157 zc BIB CAS WIS ahr ats i or aile bra De dodo Ra 158 22 3 Mul cast Seling MENT E DO o I T 158 22A GMP Fitenng Pre e T 161 225 qu X8 0 A 162 22 5 1 Wee Oe rd ej de ET 162 Table of Contents 13 ES 2724 User s Guide aD WA A UL m 162 22 0 HON MYR WOKE cass RT 163 22 5 General MVR ConfigUratlOn ssssisssririiistsreini inanin pati adde aai E aai 163 227 MYR Oroup CODO SIUE canines SG ban a do o RE LS EAR 165 284 1 MYR Configuration EXSIAB ceisaet eie robot po reru Sp rnb br E REN EE RE Co MEE bobus 167 Chapter 23 Stale ROUTE e M 169 29 1 Configure Static ROUI oed or bor Ri aset i pp oco lade odas 169 Chapter 24 i aem RETRO ERUIT TUNER T NT 171 22 1 RIP Cee ouis OP da E nime En eM 171 EL MAII RIP t M 171 Chapter 25 ci M 173 VAM Tit CARN Nem TM 173 25 2 Conig ring IGMP ec 173 Chapter 26 IP PAUSE se aka 175 20 VIP IC ET OVEN EN saaana a Eaa E AEEA milena EP ERU 175 202 An Ved KUCAS EI TT 175 Chapter 27 Differentiated ServiDes sssicscciscacsasscssacassassonsssantestasnateatassatiaseasasansetatnatsemsanatieaienens 177 NC DE U IS Mem A 177 21 11 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior i5 eir ro ER Pe RrEFMEEH Rb a Pe ego aE 177 27 1 2 Ditaery Network Example 2 cpecrcan
221. idual screens and supplementary information ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation Syntax Conventions Enter means for you to type one or more characters Select or Choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets ENTER means the Enter or carriage return key ESC means the Escape key and SPACE BAR means the Space Bar Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma For example In Windows click Start Settings and then Control Panel means first click the Start button then point your mouse pointer to Settings and then click Control Panel For brevity s sake we will use e g as a shorthand for for instance and i e for that is or in other words throughout this manual The switch Ethernet Switch may be referred to as the switch the router or the device in this User s Guide Preface 29 ES 2724 User s Guide Graphics Icons Key switch Computer Server f ll Computer m NS A Router e Central Office ISP EN p gr c Internet fik s hia Hub Switch d User Guide Feedback Help us help you E mail all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters zyxel com tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Commun
222. ification purposes Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time 142 Chapter 19 Policy Rule ES 2724 User s Guide Table 45 Policy continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field General VLAN ID Specify a VLAN ID number Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port Outgoing Select Tag to add the specified VID to packets on the specified outgoing port packet Otherwise select Untag format for Egress port Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Out of Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 63 if you want to replace or remark the Profile DSCP number for out of profile traffic DSCP Action Specify the action
223. ifications 319 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 100 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management IP Multicast With IP multicast the switch delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody In addition the switch can send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware by untagging removing the VLAN tags IP multicast packets RIP RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information with other routers RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MRSTP Multiple RSTP RSTP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a switch to interact with other RSTP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network MRSTP allows you to configure multiple RSTP configurations and assign ports to each tree Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk p
224. iiicsisssssssiavtssiatisiciacianiesisaasacraiavttohesrainsinsedeassiarieunvisbicnacs 101 TAS RRS TP DUOIVIGIM iucisuecuasa secet ebadicesosipetushded ct UEose dept EUH daner aeien 101 TTT eR Wet ros NEUEM 101 Sy Pea ae ied Wee ey 4 osa mere arene Ep Eod MESA MEq bia ert ry ire M PERI a Teter 102 TRO S S TPAPORE QUIS aani ie Do b dn cca desta 102 TA NUPE ASIP uinea a b edd alieni 103 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Main SGIGOlT iiiicccesccceceeese e recorre rrt ttn n prre ces 103 Table of Contents 11 ES 2724 User s Guide 11 3 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol eeceeeenenn nnns 104 11 4 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status sss 107 11 5 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol sssssssssss 108 11 6 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status sssssssssss 110 Chapter 12 Bandwidth Conto m P H N 113 12 1 Bandwidih Control DVeFUIBW iiec Ete ti bet Se ER RHENO AAE EERENS 113 ta LT TOR 3NI FIR Tet LEE 113 122 Bandwidih Conel Sell sredis sirenai nadaa ninaman annii aaa a pee LR Ry dde 113 Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control sieisesicisiscsvessarceseitesecestsasuecsevcchevesssctelactastcuecctevecieteessevane 115 13 1 Broadcast Storm Control SO uoce uie reete ku k tdt En hai eere i 115 Chapter 14 MUFFOFIE ies cits exis vicina A leqtaenaiaa FUP RITE E danse XR RR eR aEoE Ade psa Aer C YE eR ERR EA DE EA ERE KO 117 14 1 Porn Mirroring Sop T
225. ile name as seen in the cluster manager switch 33 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen Chapter 33 Cluster Management 219 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 120 Clustering Management Configuration Clustering Manager Active Name VID Clustering Candidate List c NSUNCNOERSEREUDISDNHCnurTIEGDID Status 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 GS 2024 Password Iv Master fi Apply Cancel Index Add Cancel Refresh MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Clustering Management Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and
226. ill be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products 6 ZyXEL Limited Warranty ES 2724 User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL LOCATION SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE support zyxel com tw 886 3 578 3942 www zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Corp CORPORATE www europe zyxel com 6 Innovation Road II HEADQUARTERS Science Park WORLDWIDE sales zyxel com tw 886 3 578 2439 ftp zyxel com Hsinchu 300 ftp europe zyxel com Taiwan soporte zyxel co cr 506 2017878 www zyxel co cr ZyXEL Costa Rica COSTA RICA Plaza Roble Escazu sales zyxel co cr 506 2015098 ftp zyxel co cr Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica CZECH REPUBLIC info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 350 info cz zyxel com 420 241
227. ime memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the switch s power is turned off 5 1 4 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID LI p 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a b LR M r Y 1 Click Advanced Applications and VLAN in the navigation panel Then click the VLAN Port Setting link Enter 2 in the PVID field for port 1 and click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the switch s power is turned off 5 1 5 Enabling RIP To exchange routing information with VLAN Fort Setting E Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP r Port isolation O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking n All n 1 Dn 2 m All bd n 3 r 1 r All D 4 r 1 n All g r 5 r 1 n All hd Dn 6 r 1 r All Y r r 1 r m E n other routing devices across different routing domains enable RIP Routing Information Protocol in the RIP screen 1 Click IP Application and RIP in the navigation panel 60 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example ES 2724 User s Guide 2 Select Both in the Direction fi
228. ination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Note Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device Chapter 29 Maintenance 193 ES 2724 User s Guide 29 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your switch 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 68 on page 193 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 29 8 3 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Add
229. ing COIITIBIIIS issuccc cuisse nde undici tide et toc kk CH dk addo 279 414 3 Re nable commande o acies ed dor Edad Foto aa ee o e at setas 279 41 4 4 Other Examples of no Commands sse 280 CUR NEQU A EN 280 41 4 4 2 no port access authenticator ssesssssssseeees 281 21 233 WO CSN obicere ecd eg MEE om nM HAM M NN MR 281 41 5 ENUM Mello Commands Lir det od vend pics see sipeed caus Re on EX REA 282 41 6 Static Route DOImImalds ucro cad berba ye e bai epe Gba debt a LEE pti a 282 41 2 Enabling WAC PINGING e 283 31 8 SOM TUNKI aie to bte t RR PRSE Rex E LORS RE PELAISSRERLE ORG AR PEE K ESAE UELLE S AERA 284 41 9 Enabling Fort AUllapmtios BON 125 coeur ooa EEOUL DI E PEU cU QE FERE UE DE E PEU EQ EC PEPP ERI BEPEUTEUE 285 41 9 1 RADIUS Server SetlingS i3 5 depiccor cci ce aca erdt a ttd ridet riore enda 285 41 9 2 Port Authentication Settings eeseeeeeeeseeeiiiesee eene tnn nena 286 Chapter 42 interlace COMMA IGS m 289 DVAMNS CI E 289 42 2 merac Command EXSIDBIBS i et ora oen tdi bor x POR Ee Ex adds 289 42 2 1 interlace esie M 289 AZ oe DPOUCOMIO Mr 289 22 2 0 BIOSOCOSDII iuscoscisni eli sspe aa MEO EEA Saa AASTA 290 42 2 43 BantWidil HIE iuussseus rto Posee EO REPE RE RITE EREER RE ERR ERE QA E PRR eo RERRH DUE 290 A foin m Beekcgund eens gaat E E 291 Me EN dazos
230. into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 70 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations 196 Chapter 30 Access Control ES 2724 User s Guide Table 70 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 30 3 1 Supported MIBs
231. is only applicable if the switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN 220 Chapter 33 Cluster Management ES 2724 User s Guide Table 83 Clustering Management Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clustering The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members Candidate List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The Switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrat
232. isplays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Configuration Backup Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Configuration Load Factory Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings Default Chapter 29 Maintenance 189 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 67 Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Configuration switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the switch System Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the switch 29 2 Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults 1 In the Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults 2 Click OK to reset all switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 95 Load
233. itch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 22 Multicast ES 2724 User s Guide 22 4 IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups This allows you to have a service available to a specific IGMP multicast group You can configure an IGMP filter profile for an IGMP multicast group that has access to a service like a SIP server for example Within a profile configure an IGMP filter to specify the multicast IP address ranges Then assign the IGMP filter profile to the ports in the Multicast Setting screen that are allowed to use the service Click Advanced Applications and Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 70 Multicast Setting IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Filtering Profile Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Profile Name Default Ada Clear Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Delete Cancel
234. ity queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for switch management and DNS domain name server and set up IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure settings for individual switch ports Advanced Application VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu You can also configure a protocol based VLAN Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a Forwarding port These static MAC addresses do not age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP to Protocol prevent network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed Control from specified source s to specified destination s Broadcast Storm Control This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher b
235. iv 10 100M Auto j n 0 gt Peer 6 Vv 10 100M Auto j Li 0 Peer 7 Vv 10 100M Auto J ri 0 Peer 8 iv 10 100M Auto gt C 0 Peer OSA SA SA SA SUA SUSANA SERA SA CSS d A MEETS ir ay ee WP ae RIP N RN Rae SU gt a 2 m 10r00 000M Auto r joz Peer 7 26 Vv 10 100 1000M Auto J 0 Peer a wel 10 001000M Auto gt n oz Peer 2 m 10 001000M Auta o Peer Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number D Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur 78 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 2724 User s Guide Table 12 Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitation the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 10 100M for an Ethernet Fast Ethernet connection and 10 100
236. ket to the egress port Select Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping or to be sent to the CPU to the egress port to send the broadcast multicast DLF marked to drop or CPU frames to the egress port Select Set the packet s VLAN ID to set the VLAN ID of the packet with the value you configure in the VLAN ID field Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets Out of profile action Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic Select Drop the packet to discard the out of profile traffic Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field Select Set Out Drop Precedence to mark out of profile traffic and drop it when network is congested Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults
237. l of the configuration screens 48 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 2724 User s Guide In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT Basic Setting Advanced Application plication Management System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup F VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast Static Routing RIP IGMP IP Multicast DiffServ DHCP Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Syslog Cluster Management MAC Table IP Table ARP Table Routing Table Configure Clone Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 49 ES 2724 User s Guide The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub links Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup VLAN Status VLAN Port Setting Protocol Based VLAN Static VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Status RSTP MRSTP Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Status Configuration Port Aut
238. lay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 7 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add IP domains Chapter 7 Basic Setting 75 ES 2724 User s Guide 7 6 1 IP Interfaces The switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 On the switch as a layer 3 device an IP address is not bound to any physical ports Since each IP address on the switch must be in a separate subnet the configured IP address is also known as IP interface or routing domain In addition this allows routing between subnets based on the IP address without additional routers You can configure multiple routing domains on the same VLAN as long as the IP address ranges for the dom
239. le 63 DIRS DSCP meting tacts dido i e a ia c Rea RE SUR 180 Table 64 DHCP DHCP Server Status 182 Table 69 DHCP SSIVel er haaanteestcenaeneeieas 183 Table OO DHOR Relay iasbenseuiivumedade en eI 3H rapa das koci EY eid a d SU 185 Table FANS cuu TTD 189 Table B8 Filename COm Ontlel e iiuoaeei cope d excite e cR cars abl oria a Ra EX ES ERE Ld ovid S 193 Table 69 Access Control Overview essssssssssseenenneeenennnnn 195 Table PO SNMP Commands eC TO 196 Table 71 SIP WARS m c HUP 197 Tahls 72 Abnpess Control SNMP issnin ensia ideoi aAa ieni a E Eiaa 198 Table 73 Access Control LOGINS xisssiicerci estere dee ntti ead depart adest petia aai i 199 Table 74 Access Control Service Access Control eese 206 Table 75 Access Control Remote Management eese 207 IE WidBosppoli A 209 Table 77 Syslog Severity LOVES niei ere innana REIHE Hp uS kx lO LR Rada 211 E Riucoo2e P 212 Table 79 Syslog Server Setup 4d vaste riti ox vei o d sed e aaia 213 Table 80 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications sssssssss 215 Table 81 Cluster Management Status uceeessceesecessiecce riesen tnn 217 26 List of Tables ES 2724 User s Guide Table 82 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example sss 219 Table 83 Clustering Management Configuration sssssssssee 220 Tone
240. le to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Set the speed to 100 Mbps in half duplex mode sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface speed duplex 100 half 42 2 14 test You can perform an interface loopback test on specified ports The test returns Passed or Failed Chapter 42 Interface Commands 295 ES 2724 User s Guide An example is shown next Select ports 3 6 for internal loopback test Execute the test command View the results sysname config interface port channel 3 6 sysname config interface test 3 6 Testing internal loopback on port 3 Passed Ethernet Port 3 Test o esting internal loopbac Ethernet Port 4 Test o esting internal loopbac Ethernet Port 5 Test o esting internal loopbac Ethernet Port 6 Test o m on port 4 Passed m on port 5 Passed m on port 6 Passed K K K K K K K K 42 3 Interface no Command Examples Similar to the no commands in the Enable and Config modes the no commands for the Interface sub mode also disable certain features In this mode however this takes place on a port by port basis 42 3 1 no bandwidth limit You can disable bandwidth limit on port 1 simply by placing the no command in front of the
241. les a classifier 13 inactive cluster Disables cluster management on 13 the switch member mac Removes the cluster member 13 address gt dhcp relay Disables DHCP relay 13 information Disables the relay agent 13 information option 82 option System name is not appended to 13 option 82 information field dhcp server Disables DHCP server settings 13 lt vlan id gt default Disables DHCP server default 13 gateway gateway settings primary dns Disables DHCP primary DNS 13 server settings secondary dns__ Disables DHCP server secondary 13 DNS settings diffserv Disables the DiffServ settings 13 fe spq Disables Strict Priority Queuing 13 on the fast Ethernet 10 100Mbps ports https timeout Resets the session timeout to the 13 default of 300 seconds igmp filtering Disables IGMP filtering on the 13 switch profile lt name gt Disables the specified IGMP 13 filtering profile profile lt name gt Clears the settings of the 13 start address specified IGMP filtering profile ip end address ip igmp snooping Disables IGMP snooping 13 ip Sets the management IP address 13 to the default value route ip Removes a specified IP static 13 mask route route ip Enables a specified IP static 13 mask route inactive Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 251 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued
242. les port mirroring in the 13 interface dir ingress Enables port mirroring for 13 egress both incoming outgoing or both incoming and outgoing traffic Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis multicast limit Enables the port s multicast limit 13 lt pkt s gt Sets how many multicast packets 13 the port s receives per second 260 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 93 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE name port Sets a name for the port s Enter 13 name string gt a descriptive name up to nine printable ASCII characters no bandwidth limit Disables bandwidth limit on the 13 port s bandwidth limit Disables cir bandwidth limits on 13 cir the port s bandwidth limit Disables pir bandwidth limits on 13 pir the port s bandwidth limit Disables egress bandwidth limits 13 egress on the port s broadcast limit Disables broadcast storm control 13 limit on the port s diffserv Disables DiffServ on the port s 13 dlf limit Disables destination lookup failure 13 DLF on the switch egress set Disables the egress port setting 13 lt port list gt flow control Disables flow control on the 13 port s ge spq Disables strict priority queuing on 13 the Gigabit po
243. longs Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of an entry IP Address This field displays IP address of the switch in the IP domain Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask of the switch in the IP domain VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the IP domain on the switch Chapter 7 Basic Setting 77 ES 2724 User s Guide 7 7 Port Setup Table 11 IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Note Deleting all IP subnets locks you out from the switch Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes Use this screen to configure switch port settings Click Basic Setting and then Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen Figure 29 Port Setup OLDEST Port Active Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control 802 1p Priority BPDU Control O Auto J 1 0 J Peer 1 iv l 10 100M Auto x E 0 gt Peer 7 iv l 10 100M Auto x r 0 Peer 3 iv l 10 100M Auto 7 m 0 Peer 4 iv l 10 100M Auto x rH 07 Peer 5
244. lue of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894 Ethernet II encapsulation Layer 2 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided 136 Chapter 18 Classifier ES 2724 User s Guide Table 41 Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided Ethernet Type Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in hexadecimal value Refer to Table 43 on page 138 for information Source MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destination MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSC
245. m 117 Chapter 15 Lit CROC umen cer 119 15 1 Link Aggregation QVOIVIGW 1aisssescecssiiemecoee er epee tert tppti eere rdv rare pL ien cBEis recs 119 15 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation Lesussicecet cron ko EcR trn Ra REC R IU ERR Et ddr Cx I EHE edd 119 1521 Link Aggregalon EE nrnna a PEDI UEM pO D QU UCE RE SURE OUR 120 15 3 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status iscsi di rrr ta porta appa da sa andis 120 15 4 Link Aggregation Setup uius sonnet nih e eta a Exp rk a e Ea a a E ra ki pacc 121 Chapter 16 Port Authenticaho M e 125 16 1 Port Authentication QYerAEW iiieecciodtrcrid pde x tasa eur Vau tad dear xx ice b ES Eb E ionii 125 TEEI RADUT ce ere yy rane te Recmne re mene year eerecee 125 165 1 1 1 Vendor Specific ANIONS iiu a Ebr REIR PIN CHI EE THE uer PROP ekenin 125 16 1 1 2 Tunnel Protocol AUFIBULE siiras iaaea 126 16 2 Port Authentication Configuration unies tior tkt RE Ra tk Rr tni En 126 16 2 1 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings isses eene eta 127 16 2 2 Aclivale IEEE COZ Tx DOCU aaiserci ed PS EPOR Maes 128 Chapter 17 Port SS CUI TE qe M 131 1744 PAUL PG SOCHH qixoessieticsdtent n quet NM EUER VON DEUM RR nea eee 131 Ae etel D te daz eeirns atts es tae aaah wees eaeas deca 131 12 Table of Contents ES 2724 User s Guide Chapter 18 MELIA Ier 135 15 1 About the Classifier and QOS 11iisecdons Habent eee a dia xara pd Ko adi coti 135 18 2 Coniiguring thie ClSSINGD er
246. mat A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 48 VLAN Tag Format Type Priority VID 152 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking ES 2724 User s Guide Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9100 TPID Tag Protocol Identifier is the customer IEEE 802 1Q tag Ifthe VLAN stacking port role is Access Port then the switch adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure Ifthe VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port then the switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the switch If an incoming frame s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the switch then the switch will not add the tag Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for On the switch configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the high
247. me copy running config interface port channel 1 2 sysname copy running config interface port channel 1 5 8 active bandwidth limit spanning tree 40 6 Configuration File Maintenance The following sections show how to manage the configuration files 40 6 1 Using a Different Configuration File You can store up to two configuration files on the switch Only one configuration file is used at a time By default the switch uses the first configuration file with an index number of 1 You can set the switch to use a different configuration file There are two ways in which you can set the switch to use a different configuration file restart the switch cold reboot and restart the system warm reboot Use the boot config command to restart the switch and use a different configuration file if specified The following example restarts the switch to use the second configuration file sysname boot config 2 Use the reload config command to restart the system and use a different configuration file if specified The following example restarts the system to use the second configuration file sysname reload config 2 Note When you use the write memory command without specifying a configuration file index number the switch saves the changes to the configuration file the switch is currently using 272 Chapter 40 User and Enable Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide 40 6 2 Resetting to the Factory Defaul
248. memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 150 Chapter 20 Queuing Method ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 21 VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN 21 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANS even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANS to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices
249. mentation 201 SSH Secure Shell 200 SSL Secure Socket Layer 202 standby ports 119 start up problems 309 static MAC address 97 static MAC forwarding 89 97 static routes 169 170 Static VLAN 85 static VLAN control 86 tagging 86 status 48 63 LED 44 link aggregation 121 port 63 port details 64 power 71 STP 107 110 VLAN 84 STP 101 321 bridge ID 107 110 bridge priority 106 109 configuration 104 108 designated bridge 102 forwarding delay 106 109 Hello BPDU 102 Hello Time 106 107 109 110 how it works 102 Max Age 106 107 109 111 path cost 101 106 109 port priority 106 109 port state 102 root port 102 status 107 110 terminology 101 subnet 325 example 328 subnet mask 327 subnetting 327 switch lockout 53 switch reset 54 switch setup 74 switching 321 syntax conventions 29 syslog 211 protocol 211 server setup 212 settings 211 setup 211 severity levels 211 system control 322 system information 69 system log 209 system reboot 191 T tagged VLAN 81 Telnet commands 234 logging in 234 management 234 temperature indicator 70 time current 73 time zone 73 Time RFC 868 73 time server 73 time service protocol 73 format 73 trademarks 1 transceiver installation 41 removal 42 traps destination 198 traps SNMP 197 troubleshooting 309 accessing the switch 309 accessing the web configurator 309 password problems 317 start up 309 trunk group 119 trunking 119 321 tunnel protocol attribute
250. mirroring Enable the monitor port 3 Chapter 42 Interface Commands 291 ES 2724 User s Guide Enable ports 1 4 5 and 6 for configuration Enable port mirroring on the ports Enable port mirroring for outgoing traffic Traffic is copied from ports 1 4 5 and 6 to port three in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original ports sysname config mirror port sysname config mirror port 3 sysname config interface port channel 1 4 6 sysname config interface mirror sysname config interface mirror dir egress 42 2 6 gvrp Syntax gvrp GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch An example is shown next Enable the IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN command to configure tagged VLAN for the switch Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Enable GVRP on the interface sysname config vlanlq gvrp sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface gvrp 42 2 7 ingress check The ingress check command enables the device to discard incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member Syntax ingress check An example is shown next Enable ports 1 3 4 and 5 for configuration 29
251. mmands 239 backup 192 restore 54 192 saving 190 configuration saving 53 console port commands 233 settings 40 233 copying port settings See port cloning copyright 1 CPU management port 92 current date 73 current time 73 D default gateway 183 DHCP 181 client IP pool 183 modes 181 relay agent 181 server 181 setup 182 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 181 diagnostics 209 Ethernet port test 209 ping 209 system log 209 Differentiated Service DiffServ 177 DiffServ 177 activate 178 DS field 177 DSCP 177 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 179 network example 177 PHB 177 dimensions 322 disclaimer 1 double tagged frames 151 DS Differentiated Services 177 DSCP DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 179 service level 177 what it does 177 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 177 dynamic link aggregation 119 E egress port 95 enable mode 236 examples 267 Ethernet broadcast address 227 Ethernet port test 209 Ethernet ports 40 default settings 40 extended authentication protocol 125 external authentication server 125 F fan speed 71 FCC interference statement 2 feature summary 50 file transfer using FTP command example 193 filename convention configuration configuration file names 193 filtering 99 rules 99 filtering database MAC table 223 firmware 70 upgrade 191 218 flow control 79 back pressure 79 IEEE802 3x 79 frames tagged 88 untagged 88 front panel 39 FTP 193 file transfer procedure 194 restrictions
252. mporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 10 on page 74 for more information BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 7 Basic Setting 79 ES 2724 User s Guide 80 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 8 VLAN The type of screen you see here dep
253. n DSCP IP Protocol Layer 3 Source Destination G Any MAC Address a macho 59 ps fa a mro C Any Port c r MAC Address shies omol IE kL kD if E G Any bd Any c Any le o I all Cc Others Hex c 1 c all Establish Only C Others Dec IP Address 0000 E Address Prefix G Any Socket Number IP Address ooo C Address Prefix 250p G Any Socket Number C Add Cancel Clear 140 Chapter 18 Classifier ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 19 Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules 19 1 Policy Rules Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 18 on page 135 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 19 1 1 DiffServ and DSCP DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired See Section 27 1 on page 177 for more information 19 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 18 2 on page 135 for more information Click Advanced Applicatio
254. n the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the power outlet Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY on the motherboard IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment For detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device The length of exposed bare power wire should not exceed 7mm Safety Warnings ES 2724 User s Guide This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly Safety Warnings 5 ES 2724 User s Guide ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purc
255. nd Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 29 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password switch setup IP Setup etc Once you have customized the switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 68 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config This is the configuration filename on the switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the switch 29 8 1 1 Example FTP Commands ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the switch ftp gt get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a dest
256. nd every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Chapter 7 Basic Setting 73 ES 2724 User s Guide Note VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 8 on page 81 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 7 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN Figure 27 Switch Setup UXESUGIEDCNENEP VLAN Type 802 10 C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active C MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer o milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer fioooo milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment evel 7 evel ez evel5 5 gt evel4 4 gt evel3 3 evel2 fi evel1 joz evel 2 pm Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 8 on page 81 for more information Bridge Control Select Active to allow the switch to handle bridging control protocols STP for Protocol example
257. nd users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 8 6 Protocol Based VLANs Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an upstream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol 88 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 2724 User s Guide Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN For example port 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and port 4 5 6 7 belong to static VLAN 120 You configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7 All upstream ARP traffic from port 1 2 and 3 will be grouped together and all upstream Apple Talk traf
258. ned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 98 Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 10 Filtering This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 10 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Filtering means sifting traffic going through the switch based on the source and or destination MAC addresses and VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application and Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figu
259. network management 322 network management system NMS 196 no commands examples 279 NTP RFC 1305 73 P password 52 administrator 199 problems 317 PHB Per Hop Behavior 177 ping test connection 209 policy 142 144 and classifier 142 and DiffServ 141 configuration 142 example 145 overview 141 rules 141 viewing 144 policy configuration 144 pop up Windows allowing 310 port authentication 125 and RADIUS 125 127 and VSA 126 IEEE802 1x 128 port based VLAN type 74 port cloning 231 advanced settings 231 basic settings 231 port details 64 port isolation 88 95 port mirroring 117 118 260 321 and commands 291 direction 118 egress 118 ingress 118 port redundancy 119 port security 131 336 Index ES 2724 User s Guide limit MAC address learning 132 MAC address learning 131 overview 131 setup 131 port setup 78 port status 63 port VID default for all ports 262 port VLAN trunking 83 port based VLAN 92 all connected 95 port isolation 95 settings wizard 95 ports standby 119 diagnostics 209 mirroring 117 speed duplex 79 power voltage 71 power status 71 power supply specifications 323 priority level 75 priority queue assignment 75 product registration 6 product specification 321 protocol based VLAN 88 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 88 example 91 hexadecimal notation for protocols 90 isolate traffic 88 priority 90 PVID 81 88 PVID Priority Frame 81 Q QoS 321 and classifier 135
260. nges if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only MAC This field displays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification Address number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column 100 Chapter 10 Filtering ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 11 Spanning Tree Protocol The switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP as defined in the following standards JEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol JEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol The switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 11 1 STP RSTP Overview R STP detects and b
261. ngs Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 51 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION IP Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the switch to remove VLAN tags from IP multicast packets on an out going port DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure marking rules and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure DHCP settings Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management Management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs IP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IP addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you
262. nk to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology 11 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 23 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUS are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed 102 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 2724 User s Guide Table 23 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 11 1 4 Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEU s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree Not
263. nning Enables STP on the switch 13 tree lt port list gt Enables STP on a specified port 13 lt port list gt path Sets the STP path cost for a 13 cost lt 1 65535 gt specified port lt port list gt Sets the priority for a specified 13 priority lt 0 255 gt port hello time lt 1 10 gt Sets Hello Time Maximum Age 13 maximum age lt 6 and Forward Delay 40 gt forward delay lt 4 30 gt help Displays help information 13 priority 0 Sets the bridge priority of the 13 61440 Switch Spq Sets the switch to use Strict 13 Priority Queuing SPQ ssh known hosts Adds a remote host to which the 13 host ip Switch can access using SSH 1024 ssh Service rsa ssh dsa key storm Enables broadcast storm control 13 control on the switch syslog Enables syslog logging 13 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 257 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE server ip inactive Disables syslog logging to the 13 address specified syslog server level 0 7 Sets the IP address of the syslog 13 server and the severity level type lt type gt Sets the log type and the file 13 facility local 1 location on the syslog server st time lt Hour Min Sec gt Sets the time in hour minute and 13 second format date month day Sets the date in year month and 13 year
264. ns and then Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Chapter 19 Policy Rule 141 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 62 Policy xn Active rH Name Classifier s General Metering VLAN ID Bandwidth Kbps Egress Port lu ee 5c Parameters Outgoing packet format for Egress port amp Tag C Untag Priority fo gt DSCP TOS 0 gt Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change Setthe packet s 802 1 priority Send the packet to priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Setthe packet s TOS field C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value Action Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packet to the egress port Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping or to be sentto the CPU to the egress port Setthe packet s VLAN ID Metering Enable Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action Set OutDrop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Policy LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for ident
265. nt to reboot system 2 Click OK again and then wait for the switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the switch 29 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Note Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Figure 97 Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN file and click upgrade button File Path Browse Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Upgrade After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number Chapter 29 Maintenance 191 ES 2724 User s Guide 29 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 98 Restore Configuration Restore Configuration g Maintenance To restore the device s confi
266. ntrol Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 Access Control Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this End Address Switch The switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the switch from the specified trusted HTTP ICMP computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 30 Access Control 207 ES 2724 User s Guide 208 Chapter 30 Access Control ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 31 Diagnostic 31 1 Diagnostic Click Management Diagnosti
267. nue Use the following steps to telnet into your switch 1 For local management connect your computer to the RJ 45 management port labeled MGMT on the switch 2 Make sure your computer IP address and the switch IP address are on the same subnet In Windows click Start usually in the bottom left corner Run and then type telnet 192 168 0 1 the default management IP address and click OK 3 A login screen displays refer to Section 39 3 on page 234 39 3 The Login Screen After you have successfully established a connection to the switch using a direct console connection or Telnet a login screen displays as shown below For your first login enter the default administrator login username admin and password 1234 Enter User Name admin Enter Password XXXX 39 4 Command Syntax Conventions The rules of the commands are listed next The command keywords are in courier new font The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt for instance ping ip means that you must specify an IP number for this command The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets for instance configure snmp server contact system contact location system location gt 234 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide means that the contact and location fields are optional Command refers to a command used in t
268. nued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 22 5 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management You must enable IGMP snooping to use MVR However MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information 1s hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the switch and S
269. nvenuivbvisiai broma ERR amano 191 Figure 98 Restore CONIIGUESUOIE ouseussdinpeteiise espe ii dpt d RR RAE RR 1I ARRA ER paa 192 Figure 99 Backup CODIIQUESUDEI 2ceci sino coner rtr aab nad aene b d n KR a abd 192 Figure 100 Access Control Lusiassssieccnic estie dde ker etus tds b td beer ese pedea a ci Ebr do Pr kic ped vs 195 Figure 101 SNMP Management Model seien rear ore aorta acras 196 Figure 102 Access Como SNMP lr 198 Figure 103 Access Control LOGINS 2 iaeicese asusta rr consecsechdeseedeens isinna an 199 Figure 104 SSH Communication Exemple uice eene rnaant etta rata tta aid aaa 200 Figures 105 How SSH WORS eneun OH die qp PEE rM ERE EM NER CIR PEPMEdE 201 Figure 106 HTTPS Implementation Gaceta Fei d ated aia o pt RR cR t sags 202 Figure 107 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer sss 203 Figure 108 Security Certificate 1 Netscape eese nenne 204 Figure 109 Security Certificate 2 Netscape eese 204 Figure 110 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection se 205 Figure 111 Access Control Service Access Control issues c cite 206 Figure 112 Access Control Remote Management sssseee 207 Foure TIS Danos Jc EP 209 POWO TIEVS ON asa 212 Figure 115 Syslog Server Setup iunsaoceeniviere nter ho Cen Rr dd EP rc ranea 213 Figure 116 Clustering Application Example ssseseseeeeeees 216 Figure 117 Cluster Managemen
270. o limit sessions A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login 1s disabled See Section 39 11 2 on page 241 for more information on disabling multi login 30 2 Access Control Main Screen Click Management Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 100 Access Control OST aa SNMP Click Here Logins Click Here Service Access Control Click Here Remote Management Click Here Chapter 30 Access Control 195 ES 2724 User s Guide 30 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 and or SNMP version 2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 101 SNMP Management Model Manager i Y Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch the switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch
271. o remove the selected entry Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes Chapter 28 DHCP 183 ES 2724 User s Guide 28 3 1 DHCP Server Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the switch is used to assign network information to the DHCP clients in the RD and Sales network Figure 89 DHCP Server Network Example P b _ Ap M moe D Y a 2 T E m In the DHCP Server screen configure two DHCP client IP address pools for the two networks The following shows an example Figure 90 DHCP Server Configuration Example ED DHCP Serer ng Status VID 2 Client IP Pool Starting Address fis2 168 2 100 Size of Client IP Pool 100 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway fiszt6821 Primary DNS Server fis2168 2 120 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete Server 192 168 1 100 100 r Delete Cancel e 28 4 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay on the switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same subnet During the initial IP address leasing the switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the switch 184 Chapter 28
272. od it will forward the request to the second RADIUS server round robin When a client sends an authentication request through the switch to the RADIUS server The switch will forward the request to the first RADIUS server If there is no response within the timeout period the request times out The client sends an authentication request again and the switch forwards the request to the second RADIUS server See Section 41 9 2 on page 286 for an example 41 9 2 Port Authentication Settings Use the port access authenticator command to configure port security on the switch Syntax port access authenticator port access authenticator port access authenticator port access authenticator where port access authenticator port access authenticator lt port list gt reauthenticate reauth period lt reauth period gt lt port list gt lt port list gt reauthenticate lt port list gt reauth period lt reauth period gt Enables port authentication on the switch Specifies which ports require authentication Enables reauthentication on the port Specifies how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port 286 Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide An example is shown next Specify RADIUS server 1 with IP address 10 10 10 1 port 1890 and the string secretKey as the password See Section 41 9 1 on page 285 for more information on
273. odically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to a specified port Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 255 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE reauth period Specifies how often a client has 13 reauth to re enter the username and period password to stay connected to the specified port s port Enables port security on the 13 security device lt port list gt Enables port security on the 13 specified port s learn inactive Disables MAC address learning 13 on the specified port s address limit Limits the number of dynamic 13 lt number gt MAC addresses that may be learned on a port queue priority 0 7 Sets the priority level to physical 13 level 0 7 queue mapping radius host index ip Specifies the IP address of 13 server RADIUS server 1 or RADIUS server 2 index 71 or index 2 auth port Sets the port number and key of 13 socket the external RADIUS server number key lt key string gt timeout lt 1 1000 gt Specifies the RADIUS server 13 timeout value mode lt priority roun Specifies the mode for RADIUS 13 d robin gt server selection remote index start Specifies a group of trusted 13 management addr ip end computer s from which an addr ip service administrator may use a serv
274. oes not form a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 8 VLAN 95 ES 2724 User s Guide 96 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 9 Static MAC Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 9 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 9 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce t
275. of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received Control This field shows the number of control packets received including those with CRC error but it does not include the 802 3x Pause packets TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after
276. of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 1s equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class C address using both notations Table 107 JAlternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK SUBNET MASK 1 BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 124 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 125 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 126 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 127 1110 0000 224 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting 327 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 107 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued SUBNET MASK SUBNET MASK 1 BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE DECIMAL 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 129 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 The first mask shown is the class C natural mask Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask is being used Example Two Subnets As an example you have a class C address 192 168 1 0 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Table 108 Two Subnets Example IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER HOST ID IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111
277. on for example 192 168 1 1 An octet is an 8 digit binary number Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal There are several classes of IP addresses The first network number 192 in the above example defines the class of IP address These are defined as follows Class A 0 to 127 Class B 128 to 191 Class C 192 to 223 Class D 224 to 239 Class E 240 to 255 IP Address Classes and Hosts The class of an IP address determines the number of hosts you can have on your network na class A address the first octet is the network number and the remaining three octets are the host ID Inaclass B address the first two octets make up the network number and the two remaining octets make up the host ID Inaclass C address the first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is the host ID Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting 325 ES 2724 User s Guide The following table shows the network number and host ID arrangement for classes A B and C Table 104 Classes of IP Addresses IP ADDRESS OCTET 1 OCTET 2 OCTET 3 OCTET 4 Class A Network number Host ID Host ID Host ID Class B Network number Network number Host ID Host ID Class C Network number Network number Network number Host ID An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 for example An IP address wit
278. on on the 13 listed ports lt port list gt Disables the re authentication 13 reauthenticate mechanism on the listed port s port security Disables port security on the 13 device 252 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE lt port list gt Disables port security on the 13 specified ports lt port list gt Enables MAC address learning 13 learn inactive on the specified ports radius server index Disables the use of 13 authentication from the specified RADIUS server remote management index Clears a secure client set entry 13 from the list of secure clients index Disables a secure client set entry 13 service number from using the selected telnet ftp remote management service http icemp snmp ssh https router igmp Disables IGMP on the switch 13 rip Disable RIP on the switch 13 service control ftp Disables FTP access to the 13 Switch http Disables web browser control to 13 the switch https Disables secure web browser 13 access to the switch icmp Disables ICMP access to the 13 Switch such as pinging and tracerouting snmp Disables SNMP management 13 ssh Disables SSH Secure Shell 13 server access to the switch telnet Disables telnet access to the 13 Switch snmp server trap Disables sending of SNMP traps 1
279. oot switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Specifies the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands 277 ES 2724 User s Guide maximum age 6 40 forward delay 4 30 lt port list gt path cost 1 65535 lt port list gt priority lt 0 255 gt lt port list gt treeIndex 1 2 Specifies the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network Specifies the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result Enables STP on the specified ports
280. or changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 33 Cluster Management 221 ES 2724 User s Guide 222 Chapter 33 Cluster Management ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 34 This chapter introduces the MAC Table
281. ort Authentication 9021K ausos ren EL aaia a Aea EP ES nada 128 ELS 40 Fort Seeus irea nd Er a Eiin EE EELA AAAS SE EETAS AAP ER ar ERNA 132 Table AT CIBSSIIBE arrean n Aa E i EA RES 136 Table 42 Classifier Summary Table 4 1 err det eo obtentu b d S Ed 68 138 Table 43 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number sssss 138 Table 44 Common IP POTS cccsecscdsssauctrescsanseescerraacs each 139 ID de sa pev vU T 142 Table 45 Polley Summary Table auos debo THU ESN IS EU ERE DIQUr ERR OPI REEF INED RSEN A 144 Table 47 Oueuing Method 1 sios d Secu o Cheb verb b re D dti Ene Odd 150 E rou VEDI dee iesene daan ai a eiia eraai naa 152 Table 49 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format 153 Tatio SD OE TO FAME saae aE HER HER We iR PUE EE RR V dA 153 Table SIYAN SARNO iran 154 IESU uer em 158 Table 59 Multicast Setting uissscdttepdeid rax bed e aaa baa e edat idt dde 159 Table 54 Multicast IGMP Filtering Profile ceres retrait ierra nk PE PYx nete xen P Enn 161 IESU A Y 164 Table 56 MYR Group CODDQUEBDOFPL uiiaesas cera aeta eek ta bun Lr A QU ee aka Sin ERA Eb R E kt dd 166 IE E 57 Statie Gli Mem 169 Tabla S9 RIP ausente ind eode doa bos Rad OR ua GR OD RA 172 Tole SO IONE p N 173 Table OU IP AMIGA simrirononei taeran eainiie inie ie Enn HR 176 E OT D i AP EE EA ANN 178 Table 62 Default DSCP IEEE802 1p Mapping eem 179 Tab
282. orts if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Port Authentication and Security For security the switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the switch For redundancy multiple RADIUS servers can be configured Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the switch Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP TFTP tool to put it on the switch Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the switch s configuration and put it back on the switch later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another 320 Appendix A Product Specifications ES 2724 User s Guide The following tables list the product specifications Table 101 General Product Specifications
283. ou to configure settings that affect the switch globally Type configin enable mode sysname config mode Command modes that follow are sub modes of the config mode and can only be accessed from within the config Config vlan This is a sub mode of the config mode and allows you to configure VLAN settings Type vlan followed by a number between 1 to 4094 For example vlan 10 to configure settings for VLAN 10 sysname config vlan Config interface This is a sub mode of the config mode and allows you to configure port related settings Type interface port channel followed by a port number For example interface port channel 8 to configure port 8 on the Switch sysname config interface Config mvr This is a sub mode of the config mode and allows you to configure multicast VLAN settings To enter MVR mode enter mvr followed by a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 For example entermvr 2 to configure multicast settings on VLAN 2 sysname config mvr Enter exit to quit from the current mode or enter logout to exit the command interpreter 39 8 Getting Help The system includes a help facility to provide you with the following information about the commands List of available commands under a command group Detailed descriptions of the commands Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 237 ES 2724 User s Guide 39 8 1 List of Available
284. ound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups v Close 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting Pop up Blocker FAG 46 2 1 2 JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Chapter 46 Troubleshooting 313 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 133 Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings 5 o e Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet 4 This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones r Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone E Medium Safe browsing and still functional CE Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites ous D Default Level OK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected
285. over WAN 194 334 Index ES 2724 User s Guide G GARP 82 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 82 GARP terminology 82 GARP timer 74 82 general features 321 general setup 71 getting help 55 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 73 GVRP 82 88 and port assignment 88 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 82 292 H hardware installation 35 mounting 36 hardware monitor 70 hardware overview 39 help in command interpreter 237 history in command interpreter 239 HTTPS 202 certificates 202 implementation 202 public keys private keys 202 HTTPS example 203 IEEE 802 1p priority 75 IEEE 802 1x 125 activate 128 reauthentication 128 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 125 IGMP 173 setup 173 version 157 173 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol 157 IGMP filtering 157 profile 161 profiles 159 IGMP snooping 157 MVR 162 ingress port 95 Installation Rack mounting 36 installation freestanding 35 precautions 36 interface commands 289 Internet setting up your browser 312 introduction 31 IP address classes 326 capability 322 interface 76 routing domain 76 services 322 setup 75 IP table 225 how it works 225 J Java permissions 315 L LACP 119 system priority 122 timeout 123 layer 2 features 321 layer 3 features 322 LEDs 44 limit MAC address learning 132 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 119 link aggregation 119 dynamic 119 ID information 120 setup 121 status 121 lockout 53 log 20
286. p Enables Bridge Control Protocol 13 transparen BCP transparency cy 246 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE classifier name lt packet format 802 3untag 802 3 tag EtherlIIuntag EtherIItag priority lt 0 7 gt vlan vlan id gt ethernet type ether num iplipx arp rarp appletalk decnet sna netbios dlc gt Source mac src mac addr source port lt port num gt destination mac lt dest mac addr gt dscp lt 0 63 gt ip protocol lt protocol num tcp udp iemp egp rsvpligmp igp pim ipsec gt establish only source ip src ip addr mask bits mask bits source socket socket num gt destination ip lt dest ip addr gt mask bits mask bits gt destination socket socket num gt inactive gt Configures a classifier A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number 13 help Displays help information for this command cluster lt vlan id gt Enables clustering in the specified VLAN group member mac address password lt password str gt Sets the cluster member name lt cluster name gt Sets a descriptive name for the
287. peed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group 15 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 119 ES 2724 User s Guide 15 2 1 Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information
288. possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12bits 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the switch 1s capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain Chapter 8 VLAN 81 ES 2724 User s Guide 8 2 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 8 2 1 GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that se
289. priority host timeout lt 1 16711450 gt leave timeout 1 16711450 gt unknown multicast frame lt drop flooding gt reserved multicast group lt drop flooding gt Enables IGMP snooping on the switch Sets a priority level 0 7 to which the switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Specifies the time out period of the switch with respect to IGMP report queries If an IGMP report for a multicast group was not received for a host timeout period from a specific port this port is deleted from the member list of that multicast group Specifies the time that the switch will wait for multicast members to respond to a leave report If no response happens in the timeout period the switch deletes the port from the multicast group Specifies whether you want to discard packets from unknown multicast groups or whether you want to forward them to all ports Specifies whether you want to discard packets in the reserved multicast groups or whether you want to forward them to all ports Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands 275 ES 2724 User s Guide An example is shown next Enable IGMP snooping on the switch Setthe host timeout and leave timeout values to 30 seconds Setthe switch to drop packets from unknown multicast groups sysname sysname sysname sysname config config config config igmp snooping igmp snooping host timeout
290. pter 41 Configuration Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide 41 3 Enabling STP Use the spanning tree orthe mrstp commands to enable and configure STP on the switch The difference between the commands is that spanning tree only allows you to set up one spanning tree configuration and the mrstp command allows you to set up multiple ones Syntax spanning tree spanning tree priority lt 0 61440 gt spanning tree hello time lt 1 10 gt maximum age lt 6 40 gt forward delay lt 4 30 gt spanning tree lt port list gt path cost lt 1 65535 gt spanning tree lt port list gt priority 0 255 and mrstp lt treeIndex gt cr mrstp treeIndex priority 0 61440 mrstp treeIndex hello time 1 10 maximum age 6 40 forward delay 4 30 mrstp interface mrstp interface mrstp interface mrstp interface where spanning tree mrstp lt treeIndex gt priority lt 0 61440 gt hello time lt 1 10 gt lt port list gt cr lt port list gt path cost lt 1 65535 gt lt port list gt priority lt 0 255 gt lt port list gt treeIndex lt 1 2 gt Enables STP on the switch Enables a specific tree configuration Specifies the bridge priority for the switch The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP r
291. r VID Type DHCP Status Delete 2 Server 10 10 10 100 100 rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 DHCP Server LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Client IP Pool Specify the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Starting Address Size of Client IP Specify the size or count of the IP address pool Pool IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for the client IP pool Default Enter the IP address of the default gateway device Gateway Primary Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the Secondary DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask DNS Server Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configurations Clear Click Clear to reset the fields back to the factory defaults VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays Server for the DHCP mode DHCP Status This field displays the starting and the size of DHCP client IP address Delete Click Delete t
292. ration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from using in band management managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the switch 3 Filter all traffic to the CPU port 4 Disable all ports 5 Misconfigure the text configuration file 6 Forget the password and or IP address 7 Prevent all services from accessing the switch 8 Change a service port number but forget it Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 53 ES 2724 User s Guide Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the switch If you do lock yourself out try using out of band management via the management port to configure the switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the switch back to the factory defaults 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be
293. re Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 107 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology Changed This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Times Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured 11 5 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP select MRSTP in the Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1 on page 101 for more information on MRSTP Figure 47 MRSTP Configuration ED Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol NN Status Tree Active Bridge Priority Hello Time MAX Age Forwarding Delay 1 O 32768 e seconds fo seconds 5 2 C 32768 fe seconds 20 seconds 5 3 m 32768 v P seconds feo seconds 5 4 C 32768 e seconds feo seconds js Port Active Priority Path Cost Tree n mm T 1 m NN 19 hs 2 P 128 s hz 3 a 28 hs sd 4 D 28 9 zl 5 m i8 ha DE 6
294. re 42 Filtering qh Active ri Name Discard source Discard destination MAC L kb EE EE kb __ oc VID Action Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Action Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 21 Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only Chapter 10 Filtering 99 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 21 Filtering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Action Select Discard source to drop frame from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these cha
295. re MAC CPU and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature in degrees centigrade at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above 70 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 2724 User s Guide Table8 System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Fan Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently RPM ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning
296. reaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding Note In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 11 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 22 STP Path Costs LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED VALUE SRC ee ALLOWED RANGE Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 101 ES 2724 User s Guide
297. reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 1 1 on page 40 for details 2 Disconnect and reconnect the switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type at1c after the Enter Debug Mode message 5 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 6 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the switch 54 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 18 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V0 8 03 14 2006 RAM Size 64 Mbytes FLASH Intel 32M ZyNOS Version V3 70 AIF 0 b1 06 17 2006 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode sysname gt atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode GOODGGCOOCCODCGCOC Total 393216 bytes received Erasing sysname gt atgo The switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after
298. ress Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory path Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 29 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the switch will disconnect the Telnet session immediately 194 Chapter 29 Maintenance ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 30 Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the switch 30 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share four sessions up to five Web sessions five different usernames and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 69 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to four One session Up to five accounts N
299. roper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the password If you have configured more than one IP interface make sure another administrator is NOT logged into the web configurator on a different IP interface using the same account Check that you have enabled web service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details Your computer s and the switch s IP addresses must be on the same subnet See the following section to check that pop up windows JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed Chapter 46 Troubleshooting 309 ES 2724 User s Guide 46 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary 46 2 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address 46 2 1 1 1 Disable pop up Blockers
300. rtificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to continue in Netscape Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the switch s certificate into the SSL client Chapter 30 Access Control 203 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 108 Security Certificate 1 Netscape x Unable to verify the identity of ES 3148 00a0c5012345 as a trusted site Possible reasons for this error Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete due to a server misconfiguration You are connected to a site pretending to be E5 3148 00a0c5012345 possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine this site s certificate carefully Are you willing to to accept this certificate for the purpose of identifying the Web site E5 3148 00a0c5012345 Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site Lo e we Figure 109 Security Certificate 2 Netscape x You have attempted to establish a connection with 192 168 1 1 However the security certificate presented belongs to ES 3148 00a0c50123
301. rts gvrp Disable GVRP on the port s 13 igmp filtering Disables IGMP filtering 13 profile igmp group Disables IGMP group limitation 13 limit igmp immediate _ Disables the IGMP immidiate leave 13 leave function inactive Enables the port s on the switch 13 ingress check Disables ingress checking on the 13 port s intrusion lock Disables intrusion lock on a port so 13 that a port can be connected again after you disconnected the cable mirror Disables port mirroring on the 13 port s multicast limit Disables multicast limit on the 13 port s protocol based Disables protocol based VLAN of 13 vlan ethernet the specified protocol on the port type ethernet type vlan trunking Disables VLAN trunking on the 13 port s Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 261 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 93 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE protocol based vlan name lt name gt thernet typ ethernet type vlan vid priority 0 72 Creates a protocol based VLAN with the specified parameters 13 inactive Disables the protocol based VLAN 13 pvid lt 1 4094 gt The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports Sets a PVID in the range 1 to 4094 for the specified interface 13 qos priority 0 7 Sets the quality of service priority for an interface 13 Speed duplex auto 10 half 10 full 100 h
302. rts to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that 1s a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANS are specific only to the switch on which they were created Note When you activate port based VLAN the switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 8 9 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen 92 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 39 Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Appl All connected v Setting Wizard Incoming 10 1 10 1D M 1 1 Y 18 19 20 21 22 23 2 25 26 27 2328 e c o m e EI elt pele ma 2 S R R S 38 8 S S a R18 BIBIBIBIG gt gt gt BIBIBIBIR gt gt gt BIBIBIBIE BIBIRIBIR gt gt gt gt gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt gt gt BIBIBIBIB gt bJEJEEJE gt gt gt e BIBIBIBIR gt gt gt o BIBIRIBIB gt bb gt gt 2 BIRIBIBIB gt gt e gt e BIBIBIBIB gt e
303. rve a more specific application for example GVRP 8 2 1 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 8 2 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 13 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process VLAN Administrative Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Control Registration Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the Forbidden specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted 82 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 2724 User s Guide Table 13 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminolog
304. rwarding 1er SER prid TE EPI EUR REA HESSE Fr Rd 98 p ZTFI ea N 99 Table 22 STP Pathi COS S uidi msasiutioeird e anoni anadan a ia 101 TNE 23 S TP POI NSS oiii eso EUR Una tid io Feb E aada despite p Dad 102 Table 24 Spanning Tree Protocol Status iusesteseshereiendden ep rud nen hbeP sirine 104 Table 25 ROT P T SBIGUESUOEL 425213 rtr rr A 106 Table 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status sss 107 Table 27 MBRSTP Config BD amp usoocs coredde eps thee ste err dtp kk end diua Se ctr bis ize tl Exit e ede 109 Table 2B Spanning Tree Protocol Status 2uieco i esti oed ER Ende de bot EE aniis 110 Table 29 Barche CODO isnddsdetnempe uiae IN epo an xn et ue DERI 114 Table 30 Broadcast Storm COMOL uuicssese eire there ci pue bed RbYI ba e pE ok ekb a eiriaa 116 E magi UU UT TUM 118 Table 32 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch asit tarn rrr Pre teen Robes asd 120 Table 35 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch 1i cir ear nii tron is 120 Table 34 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status ssssssssss 121 Table 35 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration sssssss 122 Table 36 DUDDOIEH VSA aii esti pr titer o Ehe p HU ATE EH RES ER pdt peas 126 Table 37 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 126 Table 38 Port Authentication RADIUS 1 ieuciesccto et ppp rebote FE LbXr a Rd Fons db oet 127 List of Tables 25 ES 2724 User s Guide Tabla 39 P
305. s e Create a filtering rule called filter1 Drop packets coming from and going to MAC address 00 12 00 12 00 12 on VLAN both sysname config mac filter name filter 1 sysname config mac filter name filter 1 mac 00 12 00 12 00 12 vlan 1 drop 41 8 Enabling Trunking To create and enable a trunk enter trunk followed by the ports which you want to group and press ENTER Syntax trunk T1 T2 T trunk T1 T2 T trunk T1 T2 T where T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T list interface port 1 T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T 3 T4 T5 3 T4 T5 3 T4 T5 6 gt 6 gt 6 gt lacp An example is shown next T6 gt T6 interface lt port list gt T6 lacp Enables the trunk Places ports in the trunk Enables LACP in the trunk 284 Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Create trunk 1 on the switch Place ports 5 8 in trunk 1 Enable dynamic link aggregation LACP on trunk 1 sysname config trunk t1 sysname config trunk tl interface 5 8 sysname config trunk t1 lacp 41 9 Enabling Port Authentication To enable a port authentication you need to specify your RADIUS server details and select the ports which require external authentication You can set up multiple RADIUS servers and specify how the switch will process authentication requests 41 9 1 RADIUS Server Settings
306. s 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Certifications ES 2724 User s Guide 2 Select your product from the drop down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page Certifications 3 ES 2724 User s Guide Safety Warnings For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest o
307. s This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled The speed of the Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports can be 100Mbps or 1000Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex at 100 Mbps or full duplex An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 100 1000Mpbs and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control Off 40 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview ES 2724 User s Guide 3 1 3 Mini GBIC Slots These are slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 80741 specification Rev 1 0 for details There are two pairs of Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports The mini GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled You can change transceivers while the swi
308. s the switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1 priority to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Select Replace the IP TOS with the 802 1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field Chapter 19 Policy Rule 143 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 45 Policy continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the pac
309. s CO WIS aedes east tei FL Urs ez easier wad aes 263 sal EE 264 Chapter 40 User and Enable Mode Commands eee 267 nEs C Aree 267 SOGESOD LOO EPIO Laisser iden eoetetos ente Dun Loire Bu ee XE oce ER Efi xls 267 40 2 1 SHOW SystemdABTOL TB OT iucccccseececeresescec te ost secet hee vc cet eot tv ccu t qE cer eI 267 QUE RA 1 000 p 268 215 2 BOUE DOT cxinhicoud Anion aden eee eae 268 40 24 SHOW E rn e 268 40 2 5 show mac address table eeeeesssiisss esses eina nhat natn aha int 269 MANS MAE a 270 AOA Cp M 270 205 Copy POR ABEBUOS soras sca citi eni enian epp E REX CRI nar REL CU ER EGE C La LIEB Ead 2r1 40 6 Configuration File Maintenance ice rrr eerte p re ri rr tbt Enc pipe rade 272 40 6 1 Using a Different Configuration File eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeee 272 40 6 2 Resetting to the Factory Default eeeeeeseeee neni en nennen 273 Chapter 41 Configuration Mode Commands essen nennen nnn 275 41 1 Enabling IGMP SSpIDODIDO aie orn do d t E ge di bo vt Eon eto Dong e odas 275 41 2 Configure IGMP FINOT 2 deret o cedi obo bep e Pic aa Dei epu Paga 276 cape sicing M 2FY Table of Contents 17 ES 2724 User s Guide 7314 no Command EXemples 2 1 dn puede pM dA SE p PEL ERU HE e tec Ed EE nds 279 SIAI Disable COINS mr 279 41 4 2 Resett
310. s check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch Port Isolation Port Isolation allows each port to communicate only with the CPU management port the Gigabit uplink ports and the dual personality GbE interfaces but not communicate with each other This option is the most limiting but also the most secure Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port the switch discards incoming frames for VLANS that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering PVID Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Frame Type Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All or Tag Only Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to e
311. s one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the switch to leave the multicast group The switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case a DSL port on the switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 72 MVR Multicast Television Example 22 6 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications and Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the MVR link to display the screen as shown next Note You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the switch Your switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Chapter 22 Multicast 163 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 73 Multicast Setting MVR c Ot aD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active
312. snendasenten dieb dio ahaetete dian Mop tona Ai ERE lok Hs del d dn Cada 292 LEA i ueipe A 292 20 11 1121 293 DAR o e 293 422 A0 egress set a aa 294 LU Ns PIO aiaa S T 294 EA WAS e M 295 Bae 1S SPOS UPX a e c 295 TRL MEME P 295 42 3 Interface no Command Exemples 2 cisapp eot ct dunk rr SEM En S pute VU e 296 A2 ae UWA CAI eee m 296 Chapter 43 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 22 seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 297 431 Conngunng Taggad VLAN EET EEA 297 43 2 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands 298 PE AN GARP SIOS PRETI a a Syeda ten taaeieeels 298 AB 22 GAAP VARIED inan 298 18 Table of Contents ES 2724 User s Guide Eg BUDE TIE i rriootitepttt do op etr EE Roo EE ol aea o red e t eaeita ada 299 432 A ENEE GVRP dC T EATS 299 212 5 RSA ES URS raana ccr oc addet esu a ead dus 299 Z3 Pot LAM Command S nieni eoi ato eee veu ra ex ise up dd diay Fe nta Dev a eund eode eia 299 A3 GEUPDIL VIE sadiesecisiutautelatebuietetseielotventeni nitet cele 300 43 3 2 Set Acceptable Frame Type ccciscancsctesiccincvsssctiscacs neo eoe bI EE Sb Mee perde 300 43 3 3 Enable or Disable Port GVEBP ces icae riter eat e titt RR hb cic 300 43 3 4 MOGI Statie VLAN
313. st gt no forbidden lt port list gt no untagged lt port list gt where lt vlan id gt The VLAN ID 1 4094 lt name str gt A name to identify the SVLAN entry lt port list gt This is the switch port list Enter fixed to register the lt port list gt to the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt Enter normal to confirm registration of the lt port list gt to the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt Enter forbidden to block a lt port list gt from joining the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt e Enter no fixedorno forbidden to change port list to normal status Enter untagged to send outgoing frames without a tag Enter no untagged to tag outgoing frames 43 3 4 1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example The following example configures ports 1 to 5 as fixed and untagged ports in VLAN 2000 sysname config vlan 2000 sysname config vlan fixed 1 5 sysname config vlan untagged 1 5 43 3 4 2 Forwarding Process Example 43 3 4 2 1 Tagged Frames 1 First the switch checks the VLAN ID VID of tagged frames or assigns temporary VIDs to untagged frames 2 The switch then checks the VID in a frame s tag against the SVLAN table Chapter 43 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 301 ES 2724 User s Guide 3 The switch notes what the SVLAN table says that is the SVLAN tells the switch whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have tags
314. stablish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 and RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively 22 1 1 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information 22 1 2 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 22 1 3 IGMP Snooping A switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query Report and Leave IGMP version 2 packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the swit
315. start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 8 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 8 1 on page 81 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 35 VLAN VLAN Port Setting E VLAN Fort Setting J Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP 0 Port isolation n Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking e De a Do E r 1 r i far a 2 r n Oo far m 3 DOO far rj m 4 D 1 O Al X r 5 a isd far 6 O 1 Al m 7 D hs far o OO COE NTO lie lm fll fll flier flim flim flr p flim flr flr fOr fm fm Apply Cancel Chapter 8 VLAN 87 ES 2724 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 VLAN VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select thi
316. sysname config if Chapter 45 Routing Domain Command Examples 307 ES 2724 User s Guide 308 Chapter 45 Routing Domain Command Examples ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 46 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies 46 1 Problems Starting Up the Switch Table 97 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION None of the LEDs Check the power connection and make sure the power source is turned on turn on when you turn on the switch If the error persists you may have a hardware problem In this case you should contact your vendor 46 2 Problems Accessing the Switch Table 98 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot access the Switch using Telnet Make sure the ports are properly connected You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Check that you have enabled Telnet service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details cannot access the web configurator The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the p
317. t Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults 1 Enter erase running config to reset the current running configuration 2 Enter write memory to save the changes to the current configuration file If you want to reset the second configuration file use the write memory command again with the specified index number The following example resets both configuration files to the factory default settings sysname erase running config sysname write memory sysname write memory 2 Chapter 40 User and Enable Mode Commands 273 ES 2724 User s Guide 274 Chapter 40 User and Enable Mode Commands ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 41 Configuration Mode Commands This chapter describes how to enable and configure your switch s features using commands For more background information see the feature specific chapters which proceed the commands chapters 41 1 Enabling IGMP Snooping To enable IGMP snooping on the switch Enter igmp snooping and press ENTER You can also set how to treat traffic from an unknown multicast group by typing the unknown multicast frame parameter Syntax igmp snooping igmp snooping 8021p priority 0 7 igmp snooping host timeout lt 1 16711450 gt igmp snooping leave timeout lt 1 16711450 gt igmp snooping unknown multicast frame lt drop flooding gt igmp snooping reserved multicast group lt drop flooding gt where igmp snooping 8021p
318. t Status nnn nne etn nna 217 Figure 118 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen 218 Figure 119 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch 219 Figure 120 Clustering Management Configuration sssseeeeneee 220 Figure 121 MAC Table FIDWEHGIL lt cciccsrrucesaaneciveeistnntceiaminecnatp creas R 223 Figura T22 NC TRDIG quisulesexideenibipiecn ipai e ber Lea RO b D RO dua 224 Figure 123 IP Table Flowchart iuoacsesectateieoxentak pota d exer nd dh aa E PAS pad 225 Figure 1241P A M 226 List of Figures 23 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 125 ABE TAUG 42iusiertsixkpnct XQ PH AMARE EE RAS SMRRCLR EXER LOU Ri pg 228 Figure 126 Routing Table SERI Lissrccxiies c tntinin pote ERHARE CI du RR EDEN EE LRRE CORR ep I KE 229 Figure 127 Configure Clone iuoecsscecdeka rettet bored dete viduis ride Ub exc enue 231 Figure 128 no port access authenticator Command Example 281 Figure 129 Pop Up BIODKOEI 12 us tuadet tiro a AER EETU E E Pra ere erheseia asa tu eq 310 ge MUS M 311 Figure 131 Internet COTE ouuinoxenteniisr tenta eater irc a kd cnn bcc t RR CRI b RR piu 312 Figure 132 Pop up Blocker Setlings ssiossudsickebuusdi epe PeEEEHANIN EH EPEUDE pe URDU EEFArpUCE QA 313 Figure 159 Internet DEDE iiissrcierir cdi Ddyst cond teni dore Oa Oe ia A bs URS 314 Figure 134 Security Settings Java Scripting
319. t destination ip address help Description of ping help sysname gt 39 9 Using Command History The switch keeps a list of recently used commands available to you for reuse You can use any commands in the history again by pressing the up 4 or down arrow key to scroll through the previously used commands and press ENTER Use the history command to display the list of commands sysname gt history enable exit show ip history sysname gt 39 10 Saving Your Configuration After you set the switch settings with the configuration commands use the write memory command to save the changes permanently Note The write memory command is not available in User mode You must save your changes after each CLI session All unsaved configuration changes are lost once you restart the switch sysname write memory 39 10 1 Switch Configuration File When you configure the switch using either the CLI Command Line Interface or web configurator the settings are saved as a series of commands in a configuration file on the switch You can perform the following with a configuration file Back up switch configuration once the switch is set up to work in your network Restore switch configuration Chapter 39 Introducing Commands 239 ES 2724 User s Guide Use the same configuration file to set all switches of the same model in your network to the same settings Note You may also edit a
320. t 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER seed E IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting 329 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 111 Subnet 1 continued LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 112 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VADE ANI BI IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 113 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER SA UE EIE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Table 114 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 1111111
321. t port list gt name lt name str gt mode lt dynamic compati ble gt source port lt port list gt receiver port lt port list gt inactive mode lt dynamic compatible gt name lt name str gt tagged lt port list gt group lt name str gt start address lt ip gt end address lt ip gt exit The VLAN ID 1 4094 Specifies the MVR source ports which send and receive multicast traffic ll ll Specifies the MVR receiving ports which only receive multicast traffic A name to identify the multicast VLAN group Specifies dynamic sends IGMP reports to all source ports in the multicast VLAN or compatible does not send IGMP reports Chapter 44 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 305 ES 2724 User s Guide group name A name to identify the MVR IP multicast group name str start address Specifies the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in SUPE dotted decimal notation end address ip Specifies the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the start address if you want to configure only one IP address for the multicast group Enter MVR mode Create a multicast VLAN with the name multiVlan and the VLAN ID of 3 Specify source ports 2 3 5 and receiver ports 6 8 Specify dynamic mode for the multicast group Configure MVR multicast group addresses by the name of ipgroup Exit M
322. t to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port 128 Chapter 16 Port Authentication ES 2724 User s Guide Table 39 Port Authentication 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reauthentication Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay Timer connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 16 Port Authentication 129 ES 2724 User s Guide 130 Chapter 16 Port Authentication ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 17 Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 17 1 About Port Security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through
323. tatistics of a port The following example shows that port 2 is up and the related information sysname show interface 2 Port Info Port NO 2 Link 100M F Status FORWARDING LACP Disabled TxPkts 20 RxPkts 263 Errors Tx KBs s Rx KBs s Up Time TX Packet Tx Packets ulticast Broadcast Pause Tagged RX Packet Rx Packets ulticast Broadcast Pause Control TX Collison Single c 202233 Co Co ultiple Excessive Late Error Packet RX CRC Length Runt Distribution 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 512 to 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant O OOo PFKrnmR uoocooooocoococococoococcococococcooc A A sysname 40 2 5 show mac address table Syntax show mac address table lt all lt sort gt static gt Where lt sort gt Specifies the sorting criteria MAC VID or port Chapter 40 User and Enable Mode Commands 269 ES 2724 User s Guide This command displays the MAC address es stored in the switch The following example shows the static MAC address table sysname show mac address table static Port VLAN ID MAC Address Type CPU 1 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 Static sysname 40 3 ping Syntax ping ip host name lt in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt size lt 0 1472 gt t gt where ip host name The IP address or host name of an Ethernet device in band out of Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the Don
324. tch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps Note To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down Figure9 Transceiver Installation Example RES 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 41 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 10 Installed Transceiver 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary Figure 11 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 12 Transceiver Removal Example RES 3 2 Rear Panel The following figures show the rear panels of the AC and DC power input model switches The rear panel contains a connector for backup power supply BPS and the power receptacle For the DC power input model it also contains the power switch 42
325. the specified TCP 13 session logout Exits Enable or privileged mode 13 mac flush Clears the MAC address table 13 lt port num gt Removes all learned MAC address 13 on the specified port s no logging Disables syslog logging 13 ping Sends Ping request to an Ethernet 13 lt IP host device name gt vlan lt vlan Sends Ping request to an Ethernet 13 id device in the specified VLAN s reload config lt index gt Restarts the system and use the 13 specified configuration file show alarm status Displays alarm status and 13 configuration classifier Displays all classifier related 13 information name Displays the specified classifier 13 related information cluster Displays cluster management 13 status candidates Displays cluster candidate 13 information member Displays the MAC address ofthe 13 cluster member s 242 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 91 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE members config Displays the configuration of the 13 cluster member s member mac mac Displays the status of the cluster 13 addr gt member s dhcp relay Displays DHCP relay settings 13 server Displays DHCP server settings 13 server lt vlnd id gt Displays DHCP server settings in 13 a specified VLAN diffserv Displays general Diff
326. this switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology Changed This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Times Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 111 ES 2724 User s Guide 112 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 12 Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen 12 1 Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port 12 1 1 CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop Note The CIR should be less than the PIR The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth 12 2 Bandwidt
327. time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 16 Port Authentication 127 ES 2724 User s Guide 16 2 2 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security From the Port Authentication screen display the configuration screen as shown Figure 57 Port Authentication 802 1x EAD Port Authentication Active C Port Active Reauthentication Reauthentication Timer D On seconds 1 L1 On 3600 seconds 2 r1 On 3600 seconds 3 C On 3600 seconds 4 O On 3600 seconds 5 O On 3600 seconds B E On 3600 seconds 7 5 On v 3600 seconds 8 E On v 3600 seconds OR ai Pi nn a ll lg S me a ty f an o gO CCP I OE OE OF OE GE OG XY Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Port Authentication 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row firs
328. tion Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup Screen Select the check box for the switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Chapter 28 DHCP 185 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 66 DHCP Relay continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes and start configuring the screen again 28 4 3 DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the RD and Sales network There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both networks Figure 92 DHCP Relay Network Example DHCP Server j T 192 168 1 100 IIll E m ees v 0 b Ts N s www am a 3 3 33 3 te uuum mmu Configure the DHCP Relay screen as s
329. tion ausus oce hora adea ha agat bap a npa 82 VARII T 82 Re AN COA TUS HeK M HR 82 Nau ecc eon ee eae ee Ne 82 wd Port VLAN TIRES csasincaiustsciscdveccarigacescasciicdvctand d ene sans denaeencivedertanisecducpaasnecen 83 Bd SOOO the VLAN TYPE 65555 den pair ad eddie pida e kd dU t ula B tad 83 eo aaie ilg ec 84 5 5 1 Sil VLAN SUMUS i iierteadiar catione adl denda dier con ti esce rade e 84 0 9 2 Slate VLAN Detalls si essa Siesta c ubi ieE Osada kiarn M IR EEUU pk ENEAN UR LUPA RUE EU 85 5 5 3 Conngure a Slate VLAN ssec iiec is tbi k dl Faut dat ddr Ubaldi 85 8 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings aliesiibetieniamiten atis amd keen ere a 87 cds Based ibn e 88 8 7 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN uusuouceccccciieecccke sono koci teme sininen 89 8 8 Create an IP based VLAN Example eene ei renta kno bana nia nnn a nunA 91 2 9 P rt Dased VLAN Stup sisese nn RI IE RE FER ER bEpe INR M RR ERE 92 8 9 1 Configure a Port based VLAN 225 i ntt rare ea 92 Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseesseeseeeseeseeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeees 97 B1 VEDI gare Ree ey ee Tee ere Pd MEAM RENE UMEN HE 97 9 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding aussi certain nt t ro Es 97 Chapter 10 ENTER unpucastindiebuscu ti enu UNE OESTE PARE HER ELO OK emer T E Per Mmrrrr A 99 10 1 Configure Fiternng ete 99 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol wi
330. tration 82 B back up configuration file 192 bandwidth control 321 basic settings 69 BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units 102 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 102 bridging 321 browser configuration 310 Index C certifications 2 viewing 2 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 81 changing the password 52 Class of Service CoS 177 classifier 135 137 and QoS 135 editing 138 example 139 overview 135 setup 135 137 138 viewing 138 CLI syntax conventions 234 cloning a port See port cloning cluster management 215 and switch passwords 221 cluster manager 215 220 cluster member 215 221 cluster member firmware upgrade 218 network example 215 setup 219 specification 215 status 216 Switch models 215 VID 220 web configurator 217 cluster manager 215 cluster member 215 Command Line Interface introduction 233 Command Line Interface CLI 233 Command Line Interface See also commands accessing 233 commands 233 accessing 233 and configuration file 239 and passwords 235 configure tagged VLAN example 297 exit 240 forwarding process example 301 getting help 237 interface 289 logging in 234 modes 236 modes summary 236 static VLAN table example 301 Index 333 ES 2724 User s Guide summary 240 syntax conventions 234 user mode details 240 using history 239 VLAN 297 config mode 236 examples 275 configuration 170 change running config 191 saving 239 configuration file 54 239 and co
331. ts the switch s name for 13 identification purposes https cert regeneration Re generates a certificate 13 rsa dsa timeout 0 65535 Sets the HTTPS timeout period 13 igmp Enables IGMP filtering on the 13 filtering Switch profile lt name gt Sets the range of multicast 13 start address address es in a profile ip end address ip 248 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 92 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE igmp Enables IGMP snooping 13 snooping 8021p priority 0 7 Sets the 802 1p priority for 13 outgoing igmp snooping packets host timeout lt 1 16711450 gt Sets the host timeout value 13 leave timeout lt 1 16711450 gt Sets the leave timeout value 13 unknown Sets how to treat traffic from 13 multicast frame unknown multicast group lt drop flooding gt reserved Sets how to treat traffic belonging 13 multicast group to reserved multicast groups drop flooding interface port channel Enables a port or a list of ports for 13 lt port list gt configuration See Section 39 11 4 on page 259 for more details route domain lt ip Enables a routing domain for 13 address gt lt mask configuration See Section bits gt 39 11 5 on page 262 for more details ip address lt ip gt lt mask gt Sets the IP address and subnet 13 mask of the out of
332. twork Example VLAN gt E eus _ h 1 1 Click Advanced Application and VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link OLINE The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID 1 1 Elapsed Time 1 00 31 Next Previous Change Pages VLAN Port Setting Status Static 2 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network Note The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID ED Static V aD VLAN Status ACTIVE M Name Example VLAN Group ID 2 Port Control Tagging 1 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden TxTagging Norma xed orbrdde v x Tagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 4 Normal C Fixed Forbidden M TxTagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging B Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 7 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden iv TxTagging aaa r i m Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 59 ES 2724 User s Guide 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to save the settings to the run t
333. ucing Commands 259 ES 2724 User s Guide Table 93 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE frame type Choose to accept both tagged and 13 lt all tagged gt untagged incoming frames or just tagged incoming frames on a port ge spq qo d pg Enables strict priority queuing 13 starting with the specified queue and subsequent higher queues on the Gigabit ports gvrp Enables this function to permit 13 VLAN groups beyond the local switch help Displays a description of the 13 interface port channel commands igmp filtering profile Applies the specified IGMP filtering 13 lt profile gt profile igmp group Enables the IGMP group limiting 13 limit feature number number Sets the maximum number IGMP 13 groups allowed igmp immediate Enables the IGMP immediate 13 leave leave function igmp querier Sets the IGMP query mode for the 13 mode port auto fixed edg e inactive Disables the specified port s on 13 the switch ingress check Enables the device to discard 13 incoming frames for VLANs that are not included in a port member set intrusion lock Enables intrusion lock on the 13 port s and a port cannot be connected again after you disconnected the cable ipmc egress Enables the port s to remove 13 untag vlan lt 1 specified VLAN tag from IP 4094 multicasting packets before forwarding mirror Enab
334. uide 43 3 1 Set Port VID Syntax pvid VID where VID Specifies the VLAN number between 1 and 4094 This command sets the default VLAN ID on the port s The following example sets the default VID to 200 on ports 1 to 5 sysname config interface port channel 1 5 sysname config interface pvid 200 43 3 2 Set Acceptable Frame Type Syntax frame type lt all tagged gt where all tagged Specifies all Ethernet frames tagged and untagged or only tagged Ethernet frames This command sets the specified port to accept all Ethernet frames or only those with an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag The following example sets ports 1 to 5 to accept only tagged frames sysname config interface port channel 1 5 sysname config interface frame type tagged 43 3 3 Enable or Disable Port GVRP Use the gvrp command to enable GVRP on the port s Usethe no gvrp command to disable GVRP The following example turns off GVRP for ports to 5 sysname config interface port channel 1 5 sysname config interface no gvrp 300 Chapter 43 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands ES 2724 User s Guide 43 3 4 Modify Static VLAN Use the following commands in the config vlan mode to configure the static VLAN table Syntax vlan vlan id fixed lt port list gt forbidden port list name name str normal lt port list gt untagged lt port list gt no fixed lt port li
335. ure 64 Policy Example COINTE XCtive Name lassifier s Parameters Action Vv Te st Example Metering l Bandwidth 1000 Kbps VLAN ID Egress Port fi WI SEEN B Outgoing packet format for Egress port Priority pz DSCP fina TOS o0 7 Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Sendthe packetto priority queue Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change C Setthe packet s TOS field Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packetto the egress port Sendthe matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping orto be sentto the CPU to the egress port Setthe packet s VLAN ID Metering Enable Drop the packet Out af profile Change the DSCP value action Set Out Drop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear 146 Chapter 19 Policy Rule ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 20 Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 20 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to
336. uring DHCP Server Settings You can set the switch to assign network information such as the IP address DNS server etc to DHCP clients on the network For the example network configure two DHCP client pools on the switch for the DHCP clients in the RD and Sales networks 1 In the web configurator click IP Application and DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Server link 2 In the DHCP Server screen specify the ID of the VLAN to which the DHCP clients belong the starting IP address pool subnet mask default gateway address and the DNS server address es 3 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in o DHCP Server Status VID 2 ClientIP Pool Starting Address 192 168 2 100 Size of Client IP Pool 100 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 2 1 Primary DNS Server 192 168 2 120 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete 1 Server 192 168 1 100 100 rH Delete Cancel the run time memory are lost when the switch s power is turned off 58 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example ES 2724 User s Guide 5 1 3 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 21 Initial Setup Ne
337. use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue for the 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports For example if you select Q5 the switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using Strictly Priority Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports Port This label shows the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Weight When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights GE Port SPQ Enable This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Select a queue Q0 to Q7 to have the switch use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue for the gigabit ports For example if you select Q5 the switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using Strictly Priority Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the gigabit ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile
338. uxrnnnm Multicast Status IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active O Host Timeout 260 IGMP Snooping Leave Timeout p 8021pPriory No Change IGMP Filtering Active O Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding C Drop Reserved Multicast Group Flooding C Drop Port immed Leave Group Limited Max Group Num IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Querier Mode O Default Auto gt 1 0 O bo Default 7 Auto gt 2 C O RN Default gt Auto gt 3 0 0 po Default 7 Auto gt 4 Oo m P Default Auto 5 O r RN Defautt Auto j 6 Li E RN Default gt Auto gt 7 0 0 fo Default 7 Auto gt 8 O C lo Default v Auto v AUI UI I PI AA RRA P AR RI S S P REA pa P NEL OP OE WP Cp LE LE CRUS OE OE OE OU Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port Leave Timeout Enter an IGMP leave timeout value from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds This defines how many seconds the switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an
339. witch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Chapter 33 Cluster Management 217 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 118 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen ZyXEL MENU Em sen Basic Setting GS 2024 GS 2024 Member Menu A Status El Logout El Help Advanced Application Routing Protocol Basic Setting Advanced Applications Routing Protocol Management System Info VLAN Static Route Setup Diagnostic General Setup Static MAC Forward MAC Table Switch Setup Spanning Tree Protocol ARP Table IP Setup Bandwidth Control Port Status Diagnostic Port Setup Broadcast Storm Control Cluster Management rre e regation MAC Table Port Authentication ARP Table Port Security Access Control Management Maintenance 33 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example 218 Chapter 33 Cluster Management ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 119 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch C Vo ftp 19 Connected User 192 33
340. y continued VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable Frame You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged Type incoming frames or just tagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member 8 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Refer to the following figure Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 30 Port VLAN Trunking N i vi v2 Neb Rd 8 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Switch Setup screen Chapter 8 VLAN 83 ES 2724 User s Guide
341. y which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 8 8 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 4 and 8 Follow these steps 1 Activate this protocol based VLAN 2 Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 3 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name Type IP VLAN 4 Select the protocol Leave the default value IP 5 Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 6 Leave the priority set to 0 and click Add Figure 38 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example GD Based VLAN Active iv Port 1 Name IP VLAN IP x Ethernet type C Others Hex VID E Priority 0 gt Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN 1 Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 2 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add 3 Click Add Chapter 8 VLAN 91 ES 2724 User s Guide 8 9 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing po
342. you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 19 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 55 ES 2724 User s Guide 56 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 2724 User s Guide CHAPTER 5 Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the example network Configure an IP interface Configure DHCP server settings Createa VLAN Set port VLAN ID Enable RIP 5 1 1 Configuring an IP Interface On a layer 3 switch an IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port The default IP address of the switch is 192 168 1 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 In the example network since the RD network is already in the same IP interface as the switch you don t need to create an IP interface for it However if you want to have the Sales network on a different routing domain you need to create a new IP interface This allows the switch to route traffic between the RD and Sales networks Figure 20 Initial Setup Network Exampl
343. ys all port security settings 13 244 Chapter 39 Introducing Commands ES 2724 User s Guide Table 91 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE port list Displays port security settings on 13 the specified port s radius server Displays RADIUS server settings 13 remote Displays all secured client 13 management information index Displays the specified secured 13 client information router igmp Displays global IGMP settings 13 rip Displays global RIP settings 13 running config Displays current operating 13 configuration interface port Displays current operating 13 channel port configuration on a port by port list basis Optionally specifies which bandwidth settings are displayed limit service control Displays service control settings 13 snmp server Displays SNMP settings 13 spanning tree config Displays Spanning Tree Protocol 13 STP settings ssh Displays general SSH settings 13 known hosts Displays known SSH hosts 13 information key Displays internal SSH public and 13 lt rsal rsa dsa gt private key information session Displays current SSH session s 13 system Displays general system 13 information information time Displays current system time and 13 date timesync Displays time server information 13 trunk Displays link aggregation 13 information vlan
344. ystem log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 77 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message NI OO oO BR wl N o Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 32 2 Syslog Setup Click Management and then Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings Chapter 32 Syslog 211 ES 2724 User s Guide Figure 114 Syslog e Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active D Logging type Active Facility System D local use 0 J Interface O local use 0 J Switch E local use 0 gt Authentication O local use 0 J IP O local use 0 J Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 Syslog LABEL

SMG-700 User's Guide V1.00 (Nov 2004)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents